Merge branch 'master' of git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux-2.6

Documentation/00-INDEX

@@ -250,6 +250,8 @@ numastat.txt
 	- info on how to read Numa policy hit/miss statistics in sysfs.
 oops-tracing.txt
 	- how to decode those nasty internal kernel error dump messages.
+padata.txt
+	- An introduction to the "padata" parallel execution API
 parisc/
 	- directory with info on using Linux on PA-RISC architecture.
 parport.txt

Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-bus-usb

@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/level
+Date:		March 2007
+KernelVersion:	2.6.21
+Contact:	Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
+Description:
+		Each USB device directory will contain a file named
+		power/level.  This file holds a power-level setting for
+		the device, either "on" or "auto".
+
+		"on" means that the device is not allowed to autosuspend,
+		although normal suspends for system sleep will still
+		be honored.  "auto" means the device will autosuspend
+		and autoresume in the usual manner, according to the
+		capabilities of its driver.
+
+		During normal use, devices should be left in the "auto"
+		level.  The "on" level is meant for administrative uses.
+		If you want to suspend a device immediately but leave it
+		free to wake up in response to I/O requests, you should
+		write "0" to power/autosuspend.
+
+		Device not capable of proper suspend and resume should be
+		left in the "on" level.  Although the USB spec requires
+		devices to support suspend/resume, many of them do not.
+		In fact so many don't that by default, the USB core
+		initializes all non-hub devices in the "on" level.  Some
+		drivers may change this setting when they are bound.
+
+		This file is deprecated and will be removed after 2010.
+		Use the power/control file instead; it does exactly the
+		same thing.

Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-rfkill

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+rfkill - radio frequency (RF) connector kill switch support
+
+For details to this subsystem look at Documentation/rfkill.txt.
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/state
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description: 	Current state of the transmitter.
+		This file is deprecated and sheduled to be removed in 2014,
+		because its not possible to express the 'soft and hard block'
+		state of the rfkill driver.
+Values: 	A numeric value.
+		0: RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED
+			transmitter is turned off by software
+		1: RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED
+			transmitter is (potentially) active
+		2: RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED
+			transmitter is forced off by something outside of
+			the driver's control.
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/claim
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This file is deprecated because there no longer is a way to
+		claim just control over a single rfkill instance.
+		This file is scheduled to be removed in 2012.
+Values: 	0: Kernel handles events

Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill

@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+rfkill - radio frequency (RF) connector kill switch support
+
+For details to this subsystem look at Documentation/rfkill.txt.
+
+For the deprecated /sys/class/rfkill/*/state and
+/sys/class/rfkill/*/claim knobs of this interface look in
+Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-rfkill.
+
+What: 		/sys/class/rfkill
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion:	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org,
+Description: 	The rfkill class subsystem folder.
+		Each registered rfkill driver is represented by an rfkillX
+		subfolder (X being an integer > 0).
+
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/name
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description: 	Name assigned by driver to this key (interface or driver name).
+Values: 	arbitrary string.
+
+
+What: 		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/type
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description: 	Driver type string ("wlan", "bluetooth", etc).
+Values: 	See include/linux/rfkill.h.
+
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/persistent
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description: 	Whether the soft blocked state is initialised from non-volatile
+		storage at startup.
+Values: 	A numeric value.
+		0: false
+		1: true
+
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/hard
+Date:		12-March-2010
+KernelVersion	v2.6.34
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description: 	Current hardblock state. This file is read only.
+Values: 	A numeric value.
+		0: inactive
+			The transmitter is (potentially) active.
+		1: active
+			The transmitter is forced off by something outside of
+			the driver's control.
+
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/soft
+Date:		12-March-2010
+KernelVersion	v2.6.34
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Current softblock state. This file is read and write.
+Values: 	A numeric value.
+		0: inactive
+			The transmitter is (potentially) active.
+		1: active
+			The transmitter is turned off by software.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci

@@ -133,6 +133,46 @@ Description:
 		The symbolic link points to the PCI device sysfs entry of the
 		Physical Function this device associates with.
 
+
+What:		/sys/bus/pci/slots/...
+Date:		April 2005 (possibly older)
+KernelVersion:	2.6.12 (possibly older)
+Contact:	linux-pci@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		When the appropriate driver is loaded, it will create a
+		directory per claimed physical PCI slot in
+		/sys/bus/pci/slots/.  The names of these directories are
+		specific to the driver, which in turn, are specific to the
+		platform, but in general, should match the label on the
+		machine's physical chassis.
+
+		The drivers that can create slot directories include the
+		PCI hotplug drivers, and as of 2.6.27, the pci_slot driver.
+
+		The slot directories contain, at a minimum, a file named
+		'address' which contains the PCI bus:device:function tuple.
+		Other files may appear as well, but are specific to the
+		driver.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/pci/slots/.../function[0-7]
+Date:		March 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.35
+Contact:	linux-pci@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		If PCI slot directories (as described above) are created,
+		and the physical slot is actually populated with a device,
+		symbolic links in the slot directory pointing to the
+		device's PCI functions are created as well.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../slot
+Date:		March 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.35
+Contact:	linux-pci@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		If PCI slot directories (as described above) are created,
+		a symbolic link pointing to the slot directory will be
+		created as well.
+
 What:		/sys/bus/pci/slots/.../module
 Date:		June 2009
 Contact:	linux-pci@vger.kernel.org

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb

@@ -14,34 +14,6 @@ Description:
 		The autosuspend delay for newly-created devices is set to
 		the value of the usbcore.autosuspend module parameter.
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/level
-Date:		March 2007
-KernelVersion:	2.6.21
-Contact:	Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
-Description:
-		Each USB device directory will contain a file named
-		power/level.  This file holds a power-level setting for
-		the device, either "on" or "auto".
-
-		"on" means that the device is not allowed to autosuspend,
-		although normal suspends for system sleep will still
-		be honored.  "auto" means the device will autosuspend
-		and autoresume in the usual manner, according to the
-		capabilities of its driver.
-
-		During normal use, devices should be left in the "auto"
-		level.  The "on" level is meant for administrative uses.
-		If you want to suspend a device immediately but leave it
-		free to wake up in response to I/O requests, you should
-		write "0" to power/autosuspend.
-
-		Device not capable of proper suspend and resume should be
-		left in the "on" level.  Although the USB spec requires
-		devices to support suspend/resume, many of them do not.
-		In fact so many don't that by default, the USB core
-		initializes all non-hub devices in the "on" level.  Some
-		drivers may change this setting when they are bound.
-
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/persist
 Date:		May 2007
 KernelVersion:	2.6.23

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory

@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Date:		September 2008
 Contact:	Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
 Description:
 		The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state
-		is read-write.  When read, it's contents show the
+		is read-write.  When read, its contents show the
 		online/offline state of the memory section.  When written,
 		root can toggle the the online/offline state of a removable
 		memory section (see removable file description above)

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-platform-_UDC_-gadget

@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/_UDC_/gadget/suspended
+Date:		April 2010
+Contact:	Fabien Chouteau <fabien.chouteau@barco.com>
+Description:
+		Show the suspend state of an USB composite gadget.
+		1 -> suspended
+		0 -> resumed
+
+		(_UDC_ is the name of the USB Device Controller driver)

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-picolcd

@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/operation_mode
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Bruno Prémont <bonbons@linux-vserver.org>
+Description:	Make it possible to switch the PicoLCD device between LCD
+		(firmware) and bootloader (flasher) operation modes.
+
+		Reading: returns list of available modes, the active mode being
+		enclosed in brackets ('[' and ']')
+
+		Writing: causes operation mode switch. Permitted values are
+		the non-active mode names listed when read.
+
+		Note: when switching mode the current PicoLCD HID device gets
+		disconnected and reconnects after above delay (see attribute
+		operation_mode_delay for its value).
+
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/operation_mode_delay
+Date:		April 2010
+Contact:	Bruno Prémont <bonbons@linux-vserver.org>
+Description:	Delay PicoLCD waits before restarting in new mode when
+		operation_mode has changed.
+
+		Reading/Writing: It is expressed in ms and permitted range is
+		0..30000ms.
+
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/fb_update_rate
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Bruno Prémont <bonbons@linux-vserver.org>
+Description:	Make it possible to adjust defio refresh rate.
+
+		Reading: returns list of available refresh rates (expressed in Hz),
+		the active refresh rate being enclosed in brackets ('[' and ']')
+
+		Writing: accepts new refresh rate expressed in integer Hz
+		within permitted rates.
+
+		Note: As device can barely do 2 complete refreshes a second
+		it only makes sense to adjust this value if only one or two
+		tiles get changed and it's not appropriate to expect the application
+		to flush it's tiny changes explicitely at higher than default rate.
+

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-prodikeys

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/hid/drivers/prodikeys/.../channel
+Date:		April 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.34
+Contact:	Don Prince <dhprince.devel@yahoo.co.uk>
+Description:
+		Allows control (via software) the midi channel to which
+		that the pc-midi keyboard will output.midi data.
+		Range: 0..15
+		Type:  Read/write
+What:		/sys/bus/hid/drivers/prodikeys/.../sustain
+Date:		April 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.34
+Contact:	Don Prince <dhprince.devel@yahoo.co.uk>
+Description:
+		Allows control (via software) the sustain duration of a
+		note held by the pc-midi driver.
+		0 means sustain mode is disabled.
+		Range: 0..5000 (milliseconds)
+		Type:  Read/write
+What:		/sys/bus/hid/drivers/prodikeys/.../octave
+Date:		April 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.34
+Contact:	Don Prince <dhprince.devel@yahoo.co.uk>
+Description:
+		Controls the octave shift modifier in the pc-midi driver.
+		The octave can be shifted via software up/down 2 octaves.
+		0 means the no ocatve shift.
+		Range: -2..2 (minus 2 to plus 2)
+		Type: Read/Write

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone

@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_dpi
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the
+		press of a button.
+		When read, this file returns the raw number of the actual dpi
+		setting reported by the mouse. This number has to be further
+		processed to receive the real dpi value.
+
+		VALUE DPI
+		1     800
+		2     1200
+		3     1600
+		4     2000
+		5     2400
+		6     3200
+
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_profile
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile.
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/firmware_version
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
+		firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases
+		further usage in other programs. To receive the real version
+		number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
+		left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/kone_driver_version
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the driver version.
+		The format of the string is "v<major>.<minor>.<patchlevel>".
+		This attribute is used by the userland tools to find the sysfs-
+		paths of installed kone-mice and determine the capabilites of
+		the driver. Versions of this driver for old kernels replace
+		usbhid instead of generic-usb. The way to scan for this file
+		has been chosen to provide a consistent way for all supported
+		kernel versions.
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5]
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+                press of a button. A profile holds informations like button
+                mappings, sensitivity, the colors of the 5 leds and light
+                effects.
+                When read, these files return the respective profile. The
+                returned data is 975 bytes in size.
+		When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
+		data back to the mouse. The data has to be 975 bytes long.
+		The mouse will reject invalid data, whereas the profile number
+		stored in the profile doesn't need to fit the number of the
+		store.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/settings
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse.
+		The size of the data is 36 bytes and holds information like the
+		startup_profile, tcu state and calibration_data.
+		When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse.
+		The data has to be 36 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid
+		data.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/startup_profile
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5.
+                When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile
+                that's active when the mouse is powered on.
+		When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile
+		and the mouse activates this profile immediately.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/tcu
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user
+		calibrate the laser power to fit the mousepad surface.
+		When read, this file returns the current state of the TCU,
+		where 0 means off and 1 means on.
+		Writing 0 in this file will switch the TCU off.
+		Writing 1 in this file will start the calibration which takes
+		around 6 seconds to complete and activates the TCU.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/weight
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can be equipped with one of four supplied weights
+		ranging from 5 to 20 grams which are recognized by the mouse
+		and its value can be read out. When read, this file returns the
+		raw value returned by the mouse which eases further processing
+		in other software.
+		The values map to the weights as follows:
+
+		VALUE WEIGHT
+		0     none
+		1     5g
+		2     10g
+		3     15g
+		4     20g
+
+		This file is readonly.

Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-wacom

@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+What:		/sys/class/hidraw/hidraw*/device/speed
+Date:		April 2010
+Kernel Version:	2.6.35
+Contact:	linux-bluetooth@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw*/device/speed file controls
+		reporting speed of wacom bluetooth tablet. Reading from
+		this file returns 1 if tablet reports in high speed mode
+		or 0 otherwise. Writing to this file one of these values
+		switches reporting speed.

Documentation/Changes

@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ o  oprofile               0.9                     # oprofiled --version
 o  udev                   081                     # udevinfo -V
 o  grub                   0.93                    # grub --version
 o  mcelog		  0.6
-o  iptables               1.4.1                   # iptables -V
+o  iptables               1.4.2                   # iptables -V
 
 
 Kernel compilation

Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt

@@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ failure can be determined by:
 
 			   Closing
 
-This document, and the API itself, would not be in it's current
+This document, and the API itself, would not be in its current
 form without the feedback and suggestions from numerous individuals.
 We would like to specifically mention, in no particular order, the
 following people:

Documentation/DocBook/Makefile

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml mcabook.xml device-drivers.xml \
 	    genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \
 	    mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml \
 	    alsa-driver-api.xml writing-an-alsa-driver.xml \
-	    tracepoint.xml media.xml
+	    tracepoint.xml media.xml drm.xml
 
 ###
 # The build process is as follows (targets):

Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl

@@ -0,0 +1,839 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
+	"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
+
+<book id="drmDevelopersGuide">
+  <bookinfo>
+    <title>Linux DRM Developer's Guide</title>
+
+    <copyright>
+      <year>2008-2009</year>
+      <holder>
+	Intel Corporation (Jesse Barnes &lt;jesse.barnes@intel.com&gt;)
+      </holder>
+    </copyright>
+
+    <legalnotice>
+      <para>
+	The contents of this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+	General Public License version 2 (the "GPL") as distributed in
+	the kernel source COPYING file.
+      </para>
+    </legalnotice>
+  </bookinfo>
+
+<toc></toc>
+
+  <!-- Introduction -->
+
+  <chapter id="drmIntroduction">
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+    <para>
+      The Linux DRM layer contains code intended to support the needs
+      of complex graphics devices, usually containing programmable
+      pipelines well suited to 3D graphics acceleration.  Graphics
+      drivers in the kernel can make use of DRM functions to make
+      tasks like memory management, interrupt handling and DMA easier,
+      and provide a uniform interface to applications.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      A note on versions: this guide covers features found in the DRM
+      tree, including the TTM memory manager, output configuration and
+      mode setting, and the new vblank internals, in addition to all
+      the regular features found in current kernels.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      [Insert diagram of typical DRM stack here]
+    </para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <!-- Internals -->
+
+  <chapter id="drmInternals">
+    <title>DRM Internals</title>
+    <para>
+      This chapter documents DRM internals relevant to driver authors
+      and developers working to add support for the latest features to
+      existing drivers.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      First, we'll go over some typical driver initialization
+      requirements, like setting up command buffers, creating an
+      initial output configuration, and initializing core services.
+      Subsequent sections will cover core internals in more detail,
+      providing implementation notes and examples.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      The DRM layer provides several services to graphics drivers,
+      many of them driven by the application interfaces it provides
+      through libdrm, the library that wraps most of the DRM ioctls.
+      These include vblank event handling, memory
+      management, output management, framebuffer management, command
+      submission &amp; fencing, suspend/resume support, and DMA
+      services.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      The core of every DRM driver is struct drm_device.  Drivers
+      will typically statically initialize a drm_device structure,
+      then pass it to drm_init() at load time.
+    </para>
+
+  <!-- Internals: driver init -->
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Driver initialization</title>
+    <para>
+      Before calling the DRM initialization routines, the driver must
+      first create and fill out a struct drm_device structure.
+    </para>
+    <programlisting>
+      static struct drm_driver driver = {
+	/* don't use mtrr's here, the Xserver or user space app should
+	 * deal with them for intel hardware.
+	 */
+	.driver_features =
+	    DRIVER_USE_AGP | DRIVER_REQUIRE_AGP |
+	    DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ | DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED | DRIVER_MODESET,
+	.load = i915_driver_load,
+	.unload = i915_driver_unload,
+	.firstopen = i915_driver_firstopen,
+	.lastclose = i915_driver_lastclose,
+	.preclose = i915_driver_preclose,
+	.save = i915_save,
+	.restore = i915_restore,
+	.device_is_agp = i915_driver_device_is_agp,
+	.get_vblank_counter = i915_get_vblank_counter,
+	.enable_vblank = i915_enable_vblank,
+	.disable_vblank = i915_disable_vblank,
+	.irq_preinstall = i915_driver_irq_preinstall,
+	.irq_postinstall = i915_driver_irq_postinstall,
+	.irq_uninstall = i915_driver_irq_uninstall,
+	.irq_handler = i915_driver_irq_handler,
+	.reclaim_buffers = drm_core_reclaim_buffers,
+	.get_map_ofs = drm_core_get_map_ofs,
+	.get_reg_ofs = drm_core_get_reg_ofs,
+	.fb_probe = intelfb_probe,
+	.fb_remove = intelfb_remove,
+	.fb_resize = intelfb_resize,
+	.master_create = i915_master_create,
+	.master_destroy = i915_master_destroy,
+#if defined(CONFIG_DEBUG_FS)
+	.debugfs_init = i915_debugfs_init,
+	.debugfs_cleanup = i915_debugfs_cleanup,
+#endif
+	.gem_init_object = i915_gem_init_object,
+	.gem_free_object = i915_gem_free_object,
+	.gem_vm_ops = &amp;i915_gem_vm_ops,
+	.ioctls = i915_ioctls,
+	.fops = {
+		.owner = THIS_MODULE,
+		.open = drm_open,
+		.release = drm_release,
+		.ioctl = drm_ioctl,
+		.mmap = drm_mmap,
+		.poll = drm_poll,
+		.fasync = drm_fasync,
+#ifdef CONFIG_COMPAT
+		.compat_ioctl = i915_compat_ioctl,
+#endif
+		},
+	.pci_driver = {
+		.name = DRIVER_NAME,
+		.id_table = pciidlist,
+		.probe = probe,
+		.remove = __devexit_p(drm_cleanup_pci),
+		},
+	.name = DRIVER_NAME,
+	.desc = DRIVER_DESC,
+	.date = DRIVER_DATE,
+	.major = DRIVER_MAJOR,
+	.minor = DRIVER_MINOR,
+	.patchlevel = DRIVER_PATCHLEVEL,
+      };
+    </programlisting>
+    <para>
+      In the example above, taken from the i915 DRM driver, the driver
+      sets several flags indicating what core features it supports.
+      We'll go over the individual callbacks in later sections.  Since
+      flags indicate which features your driver supports to the DRM
+      core, you need to set most of them prior to calling drm_init().  Some,
+      like DRIVER_MODESET can be set later based on user supplied parameters,
+      but that's the exception rather than the rule.
+    </para>
+    <variablelist>
+      <title>Driver flags</title>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_USE_AGP</term>
+	<listitem><para>
+	    Driver uses AGP interface
+	</para></listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_REQUIRE_AGP</term>
+	<listitem><para>
+	    Driver needs AGP interface to function.
+	</para></listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_USE_MTRR</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Driver uses MTRR interface for mapping memory.  Deprecated.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_PCI_DMA</term>
+	<listitem><para>
+	    Driver is capable of PCI DMA.  Deprecated.
+	</para></listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_SG</term>
+	<listitem><para>
+	    Driver can perform scatter/gather DMA.  Deprecated.
+	</para></listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_HAVE_DMA</term>
+	<listitem><para>Driver supports DMA.  Deprecated.</para></listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ</term><term>DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ indicates whether the driver has a IRQ
+	    handler, DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED indicates whether the device &amp;
+	    handler support shared IRQs (note that this is required of
+	    PCI drivers).
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_DMA_QUEUE</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    If the driver queues DMA requests and completes them
+	    asynchronously, this flag should be set.  Deprecated.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_FB_DMA</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Driver supports DMA to/from the framebuffer.  Deprecated.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_MODESET</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Driver supports mode setting interfaces.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+    <para>
+      In this specific case, the driver requires AGP and supports
+      IRQs.  DMA, as we'll see, is handled by device specific ioctls
+      in this case.  It also supports the kernel mode setting APIs, though
+      unlike in the actual i915 driver source, this example unconditionally
+      exports KMS capability.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <!-- Internals: driver load -->
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Driver load</title>
+    <para>
+      In the previous section, we saw what a typical drm_driver
+      structure might look like.  One of the more important fields in
+      the structure is the hook for the load function.
+    </para>
+    <programlisting>
+      static struct drm_driver driver = {
+      	...
+      	.load = i915_driver_load,
+        ...
+      };
+    </programlisting>
+    <para>
+      The load function has many responsibilities: allocating a driver
+      private structure, specifying supported performance counters,
+      configuring the device (e.g. mapping registers &amp; command
+      buffers), initializing the memory manager, and setting up the
+      initial output configuration.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Note that the tasks performed at driver load time must not
+      conflict with DRM client requirements.  For instance, if user
+      level mode setting drivers are in use, it would be problematic
+      to perform output discovery &amp; configuration at load time.
+      Likewise, if pre-memory management aware user level drivers are
+      in use, memory management and command buffer setup may need to
+      be omitted.  These requirements are driver specific, and care
+      needs to be taken to keep both old and new applications and
+      libraries working.  The i915 driver supports the "modeset"
+      module parameter to control whether advanced features are
+      enabled at load time or in legacy fashion.  If compatibility is
+      a concern (e.g. with drivers converted over to the new interfaces
+      from the old ones), care must be taken to prevent incompatible
+      device initialization and control with the currently active
+      userspace drivers.
+    </para>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Driver private &amp; performance counters</title>
+      <para>
+	The driver private hangs off the main drm_device structure and
+	can be used for tracking various device specific bits of
+	information, like register offsets, command buffer status,
+	register state for suspend/resume, etc.  At load time, a
+	driver can simply allocate one and set drm_device.dev_priv
+	appropriately; at unload the driver can free it and set
+	drm_device.dev_priv to NULL.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	The DRM supports several counters which can be used for rough
+	performance characterization.  Note that the DRM stat counter
+	system is not often used by applications, and supporting
+	additional counters is completely optional.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	These interfaces are deprecated and should not be used.  If performance
+	monitoring is desired, the developer should investigate and
+	potentially enhance the kernel perf and tracing infrastructure to export
+	GPU related performance information to performance monitoring
+	tools and applications.
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Configuring the device</title>
+      <para>
+	Obviously, device configuration will be device specific.
+	However, there are several common operations: finding a
+	device's PCI resources, mapping them, and potentially setting
+	up an IRQ handler.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	Finding &amp; mapping resources is fairly straightforward.  The
+	DRM wrapper functions, drm_get_resource_start() and
+	drm_get_resource_len() can be used to find BARs on the given
+	drm_device struct.  Once those values have been retrieved, the
+	driver load function can call drm_addmap() to create a new
+	mapping for the BAR in question.  Note you'll probably want a
+	drm_local_map_t in your driver private structure to track any
+	mappings you create.
+<!-- !Fdrivers/gpu/drm/drm_bufs.c drm_get_resource_* -->
+<!-- !Finclude/drm/drmP.h drm_local_map_t -->
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	if compatibility with other operating systems isn't a concern
+	(DRM drivers can run under various BSD variants and OpenSolaris),
+	native Linux calls can be used for the above, e.g. pci_resource_*
+	and iomap*/iounmap.  See the Linux device driver book for more
+	info.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	Once you have a register map, you can use the DRM_READn() and
+	DRM_WRITEn() macros to access the registers on your device, or
+	use driver specific versions to offset into your MMIO space
+	relative to a driver specific base pointer (see I915_READ for
+	example).
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	If your device supports interrupt generation, you may want to
+	setup an interrupt handler at driver load time as well.  This
+	is done using the drm_irq_install() function.  If your device
+	supports vertical blank interrupts, it should call
+	drm_vblank_init() to initialize the core vblank handling code before
+	enabling interrupts on your device.  This ensures the vblank related
+	structures are allocated and allows the core to handle vblank events.
+      </para>
+<!--!Fdrivers/char/drm/drm_irq.c drm_irq_install-->
+      <para>
+	Once your interrupt handler is registered (it'll use your
+	drm_driver.irq_handler as the actual interrupt handling
+	function), you can safely enable interrupts on your device,
+	assuming any other state your interrupt handler uses is also
+	initialized.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	Another task that may be necessary during configuration is
+	mapping the video BIOS.  On many devices, the VBIOS describes
+	device configuration, LCD panel timings (if any), and contains
+	flags indicating device state.  Mapping the BIOS can be done
+	using the pci_map_rom() call, a convenience function that
+	takes care of mapping the actual ROM, whether it has been
+	shadowed into memory (typically at address 0xc0000) or exists
+	on the PCI device in the ROM BAR.  Note that once you've
+	mapped the ROM and extracted any necessary information, be
+	sure to unmap it; on many devices the ROM address decoder is
+	shared with other BARs, so leaving it mapped can cause
+	undesired behavior like hangs or memory corruption.
+<!--!Fdrivers/pci/rom.c pci_map_rom-->
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Memory manager initialization</title>
+      <para>
+	In order to allocate command buffers, cursor memory, scanout
+	buffers, etc., as well as support the latest features provided
+	by packages like Mesa and the X.Org X server, your driver
+	should support a memory manager.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	If your driver supports memory management (it should!), you'll
+	need to set that up at load time as well.  How you intialize
+	it depends on which memory manager you're using, TTM or GEM.
+      </para>
+      <sect3>
+	<title>TTM initialization</title>
+	<para>
+	  TTM (for Translation Table Manager) manages video memory and
+	  aperture space for graphics devices. TTM supports both UMA devices
+	  and devices with dedicated video RAM (VRAM), i.e. most discrete
+	  graphics devices.  If your device has dedicated RAM, supporting
+	  TTM is desireable.  TTM also integrates tightly with your
+	  driver specific buffer execution function.  See the radeon
+	  driver for examples.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  The core TTM structure is the ttm_bo_driver struct.  It contains
+	  several fields with function pointers for initializing the TTM,
+	  allocating and freeing memory, waiting for command completion
+	  and fence synchronization, and memory migration.  See the
+	  radeon_ttm.c file for an example of usage.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  The ttm_global_reference structure is made up of several fields:
+	</para>
+	<programlisting>
+	  struct ttm_global_reference {
+	  	enum ttm_global_types global_type;
+	  	size_t size;
+	  	void *object;
+	  	int (*init) (struct ttm_global_reference *);
+	  	void (*release) (struct ttm_global_reference *);
+	  };
+	</programlisting>
+	<para>
+	  There should be one global reference structure for your memory
+	  manager as a whole, and there will be others for each object
+	  created by the memory manager at runtime.  Your global TTM should
+	  have a type of TTM_GLOBAL_TTM_MEM.  The size field for the global
+	  object should be sizeof(struct ttm_mem_global), and the init and
+	  release hooks should point at your driver specific init and
+	  release routines, which will probably eventually call
+	  ttm_mem_global_init and ttm_mem_global_release respectively.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  Once your global TTM accounting structure is set up and initialized
+	  (done by calling ttm_global_item_ref on the global object you
+	  just created), you'll need to create a buffer object TTM to
+	  provide a pool for buffer object allocation by clients and the
+	  kernel itself.  The type of this object should be TTM_GLOBAL_TTM_BO,
+	  and its size should be sizeof(struct ttm_bo_global).  Again,
+	  driver specific init and release functions can be provided,
+	  likely eventually calling ttm_bo_global_init and
+	  ttm_bo_global_release, respectively.  Also like the previous
+	  object, ttm_global_item_ref is used to create an initial reference
+	  count for the TTM, which will call your initalization function.
+	</para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+	<title>GEM initialization</title>
+	<para>
+	  GEM is an alternative to TTM, designed specifically for UMA
+	  devices.  It has simpler initialization and execution requirements
+	  than TTM, but has no VRAM management capability.  Core GEM
+	  initialization is comprised of a basic drm_mm_init call to create
+	  a GTT DRM MM object, which provides an address space pool for
+	  object allocation.  In a KMS configuration, the driver will
+	  need to allocate and initialize a command ring buffer following
+	  basic GEM initialization.  Most UMA devices have a so-called
+	  "stolen" memory region, which provides space for the initial
+	  framebuffer and large, contiguous memory regions required by the
+	  device.  This space is not typically managed by GEM, and must
+	  be initialized separately into its own DRM MM object.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  Initialization will be driver specific, and will depend on
+	  the architecture of the device.  In the case of Intel
+	  integrated graphics chips like 965GM, GEM initialization can
+	  be done by calling the internal GEM init function,
+	  i915_gem_do_init().  Since the 965GM is a UMA device
+	  (i.e. it doesn't have dedicated VRAM), GEM will manage
+	  making regular RAM available for GPU operations.  Memory set
+	  aside by the BIOS (called "stolen" memory by the i915
+	  driver) will be managed by the DRM memrange allocator; the
+	  rest of the aperture will be managed by GEM.
+	  <programlisting>
+	    /* Basic memrange allocator for stolen space (aka vram) */
+	    drm_memrange_init(&amp;dev_priv->vram, 0, prealloc_size);
+	    /* Let GEM Manage from end of prealloc space to end of aperture */
+	    i915_gem_do_init(dev, prealloc_size, agp_size);
+	  </programlisting>
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_memrange.c-->
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  Once the memory manager has been set up, we can allocate the
+	  command buffer.  In the i915 case, this is also done with a
+	  GEM function, i915_gem_init_ringbuffer().
+	</para>
+      </sect3>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Output configuration</title>
+      <para>
+	The final initialization task is output configuration.  This involves
+	finding and initializing the CRTCs, encoders and connectors
+	for your device, creating an initial configuration and
+	registering a framebuffer console driver.
+      </para>
+      <sect3>
+	<title>Output discovery and initialization</title>
+	<para>
+	  Several core functions exist to create CRTCs, encoders and
+	  connectors, namely drm_crtc_init(), drm_connector_init() and
+	  drm_encoder_init(), along with several "helper" functions to
+	  perform common tasks.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  Connectors should be registered with sysfs once they've been
+	  detected and initialized, using the
+	  drm_sysfs_connector_add() function.  Likewise, when they're
+	  removed from the system, they should be destroyed with
+	  drm_sysfs_connector_remove().
+	</para>
+	<programlisting>
+<![CDATA[
+void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev)
+{
+	struct drm_connector *connector;
+	struct intel_output *intel_output;
+
+	intel_output = kzalloc(sizeof(struct intel_output), GFP_KERNEL);
+	if (!intel_output)
+		return;
+
+	connector = &intel_output->base;
+	drm_connector_init(dev, &intel_output->base,
+			   &intel_crt_connector_funcs, DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_VGA);
+
+	drm_encoder_init(dev, &intel_output->enc, &intel_crt_enc_funcs,
+			 DRM_MODE_ENCODER_DAC);
+
+	drm_mode_connector_attach_encoder(&intel_output->base,
+					  &intel_output->enc);
+
+	/* Set up the DDC bus. */
+	intel_output->ddc_bus = intel_i2c_create(dev, GPIOA, "CRTDDC_A");
+	if (!intel_output->ddc_bus) {
+		dev_printk(KERN_ERR, &dev->pdev->dev, "DDC bus registration "
+			   "failed.\n");
+		return;
+	}
+
+	intel_output->type = INTEL_OUTPUT_ANALOG;
+	connector->interlace_allowed = 0;
+	connector->doublescan_allowed = 0;
+
+	drm_encoder_helper_add(&intel_output->enc, &intel_crt_helper_funcs);
+	drm_connector_helper_add(connector, &intel_crt_connector_helper_funcs);
+
+	drm_sysfs_connector_add(connector);
+}
+]]>
+	</programlisting>
+	<para>
+	  In the example above (again, taken from the i915 driver), a
+	  CRT connector and encoder combination is created.  A device
+	  specific i2c bus is also created, for fetching EDID data and
+	  performing monitor detection.  Once the process is complete,
+	  the new connector is regsitered with sysfs, to make its
+	  properties available to applications.
+	</para>
+	<sect4>
+	  <title>Helper functions and core functions</title>
+	  <para>
+	    Since many PC-class graphics devices have similar display output
+	    designs, the DRM provides a set of helper functions to make
+	    output management easier.  The core helper routines handle
+	    encoder re-routing and disabling of unused functions following
+	    mode set.  Using the helpers is optional, but recommended for
+	    devices with PC-style architectures (i.e. a set of display planes
+	    for feeding pixels to encoders which are in turn routed to
+	    connectors).  Devices with more complex requirements needing
+	    finer grained management can opt to use the core callbacks
+	    directly.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	    [Insert typical diagram here.]  [Insert OMAP style config here.]
+	  </para>
+	</sect4>
+	<para>
+	  For each encoder, CRTC and connector, several functions must
+	  be provided, depending on the object type.  Encoder objects
+	  need should provide a DPMS (basically on/off) function, mode fixup
+	  (for converting requested modes into native hardware timings),
+	  and prepare, set and commit functions for use by the core DRM
+	  helper functions.  Connector helpers need to provide mode fetch and
+	  validity functions as well as an encoder matching function for
+	  returing an ideal encoder for a given connector.  The core
+	  connector functions include a DPMS callback, (deprecated)
+	  save/restore routines, detection, mode probing, property handling,
+	  and cleanup functions.
+	</para>
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.h-->
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.c-->
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc_helper.c-->
+      </sect3>
+    </sect2>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <!-- Internals: vblank handling -->
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>VBlank event handling</title>
+    <para>
+      The DRM core exposes two vertical blank related ioctls:
+      DRM_IOCTL_WAIT_VBLANK and DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL.
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_irq.c-->
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      DRM_IOCTL_WAIT_VBLANK takes a struct drm_wait_vblank structure
+      as its argument, and is used to block or request a signal when a
+      specified vblank event occurs.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL should be called by application level
+      drivers before and after mode setting, since on many devices the
+      vertical blank counter will be reset at that time.  Internally,
+      the DRM snapshots the last vblank count when the ioctl is called
+      with the _DRM_PRE_MODESET command so that the counter won't go
+      backwards (which is dealt with when _DRM_POST_MODESET is used).
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      To support the functions above, the DRM core provides several
+      helper functions for tracking vertical blank counters, and
+      requires drivers to provide several callbacks:
+      get_vblank_counter(), enable_vblank() and disable_vblank().  The
+      core uses get_vblank_counter() to keep the counter accurate
+      across interrupt disable periods.  It should return the current
+      vertical blank event count, which is often tracked in a device
+      register.  The enable and disable vblank callbacks should enable
+      and disable vertical blank interrupts, respectively.  In the
+      absence of DRM clients waiting on vblank events, the core DRM
+      code will use the disable_vblank() function to disable
+      interrupts, which saves power.  They'll be re-enabled again when
+      a client calls the vblank wait ioctl above.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Devices that don't provide a count register can simply use an
+      internal atomic counter incremented on every vertical blank
+      interrupt, and can make their enable and disable vblank
+      functions into no-ops.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Memory management</title>
+    <para>
+      The memory manager lies at the heart of many DRM operations, and
+      is also required to support advanced client features like OpenGL
+      pbuffers.  The DRM currently contains two memory managers, TTM
+      and GEM.
+    </para>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>The Translation Table Manager (TTM)</title>
+      <para>
+	TTM was developed by Tungsten Graphics, primarily by Thomas
+	Hellström, and is intended to be a flexible, high performance
+	graphics memory manager.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	Drivers wishing to support TTM must fill out a drm_bo_driver
+	structure.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	TTM design background and information belongs here.
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>The Graphics Execution Manager (GEM)</title>
+      <para>
+	GEM is an Intel project, authored by Eric Anholt and Keith
+	Packard.  It provides simpler interfaces than TTM, and is well
+	suited for UMA devices.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	GEM-enabled drivers must provide gem_init_object() and
+	gem_free_object() callbacks to support the core memory
+	allocation routines.  They should also provide several driver
+	specific ioctls to support command execution, pinning, buffer
+	read &amp; write, mapping, and domain ownership transfers.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	On a fundamental level, GEM involves several operations: memory
+	allocation and freeing, command execution, and aperture management
+	at command execution time.  Buffer object allocation is relatively
+	straightforward and largely provided by Linux's shmem layer, which
+	provides memory to back each object.  When mapped into the GTT
+	or used in a command buffer, the backing pages for an object are
+	flushed to memory and marked write combined so as to be coherent
+	with the GPU.  Likewise, when the GPU finishes rendering to an object,
+	if the CPU accesses it, it must be made coherent with the CPU's view
+	of memory, usually involving GPU cache flushing of various kinds.
+	This core CPU&lt;-&gt;GPU coherency management is provided by the GEM
+	set domain function, which evaluates an object's current domain and
+	performs any necessary flushing or synchronization to put the object
+	into the desired coherency domain (note that the object may be busy,
+	i.e. an active render target; in that case the set domain function
+	will block the client and wait for rendering to complete before
+	performing any necessary flushing operations).
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	Perhaps the most important GEM function is providing a command
+	execution interface to clients.  Client programs construct command
+	buffers containing references to previously allocated memory objects
+	and submit them to GEM.  At that point, GEM will take care to bind
+	all the objects into the GTT, execute the buffer, and provide
+	necessary synchronization between clients accessing the same buffers.
+	This often involves evicting some objects from the GTT and re-binding
+	others (a fairly expensive operation), and providing relocation
+	support which hides fixed GTT offsets from clients.  Clients must
+	take care not to submit command buffers that reference more objects
+	than can fit in the GTT or GEM will reject them and no rendering
+	will occur.  Similarly, if several objects in the buffer require
+	fence registers to be allocated for correct rendering (e.g. 2D blits
+	on pre-965 chips), care must be taken not to require more fence
+	registers than are available to the client.  Such resource management
+	should be abstracted from the client in libdrm.
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+
+  </sect1>
+
+  <!-- Output management -->
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Output management</title>
+    <para>
+      At the core of the DRM output management code is a set of
+      structures representing CRTCs, encoders and connectors.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      A CRTC is an abstraction representing a part of the chip that
+      contains a pointer to a scanout buffer.  Therefore, the number
+      of CRTCs available determines how many independent scanout
+      buffers can be active at any given time.  The CRTC structure
+      contains several fields to support this: a pointer to some video
+      memory, a display mode, and an (x, y) offset into the video
+      memory to support panning or configurations where one piece of
+      video memory spans multiple CRTCs.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      An encoder takes pixel data from a CRTC and converts it to a
+      format suitable for any attached connectors.  On some devices,
+      it may be possible to have a CRTC send data to more than one
+      encoder.  In that case, both encoders would receive data from
+      the same scanout buffer, resulting in a "cloned" display
+      configuration across the connectors attached to each encoder.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      A connector is the final destination for pixel data on a device,
+      and usually connects directly to an external display device like
+      a monitor or laptop panel.  A connector can only be attached to
+      one encoder at a time.  The connector is also the structure
+      where information about the attached display is kept, so it
+      contains fields for display data, EDID data, DPMS &amp;
+      connection status, and information about modes supported on the
+      attached displays.
+    </para>
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.c-->
+  </sect1>
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Framebuffer management</title>
+    <para>
+      In order to set a mode on a given CRTC, encoder and connector
+      configuration, clients need to provide a framebuffer object which
+      will provide a source of pixels for the CRTC to deliver to the encoder(s)
+      and ultimately the connector(s) in the configuration.  A framebuffer
+      is fundamentally a driver specific memory object, made into an opaque
+      handle by the DRM addfb function.  Once an fb has been created this
+      way it can be passed to the KMS mode setting routines for use in
+      a configuration.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Command submission &amp; fencing</title>
+    <para>
+      This should cover a few device specific command submission
+      implementations.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Suspend/resume</title>
+    <para>
+      The DRM core provides some suspend/resume code, but drivers
+      wanting full suspend/resume support should provide save() and
+      restore() functions.  These will be called at suspend,
+      hibernate, or resume time, and should perform any state save or
+      restore required by your device across suspend or hibernate
+      states.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>DMA services</title>
+    <para>
+      This should cover how DMA mapping etc. is supported by the core.
+      These functions are deprecated and should not be used.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <!-- External interfaces -->
+
+  <chapter id="drmExternals">
+    <title>Userland interfaces</title>
+    <para>
+      The DRM core exports several interfaces to applications,
+      generally intended to be used through corresponding libdrm
+      wrapper functions.  In addition, drivers export device specific
+      interfaces for use by userspace drivers &amp; device aware
+      applications through ioctls and sysfs files.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      External interfaces include: memory mapping, context management,
+      DMA operations, AGP management, vblank control, fence
+      management, memory management, and output management.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Cover generic ioctls and sysfs layout here.  Only need high
+      level info, since man pages will cover the rest.
+    </para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <!-- API reference -->
+
+  <appendix id="drmDriverApi">
+    <title>DRM Driver API</title>
+    <para>
+      Include auto-generated API reference here (need to reference it
+      from paragraphs above too).
+    </para>
+  </appendix>
+
+</book>

Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
 
 <book id="kgdbOnLinux">
  <bookinfo>
-  <title>Using kgdb and the kgdb Internals</title>
+  <title>Using kgdb, kdb and the kernel debugger internals</title>
 
   <authorgroup>
    <author>
@@ -17,33 +17,8 @@
     </affiliation>
    </author>
   </authorgroup>
-
-  <authorgroup>
-   <author>
-    <firstname>Tom</firstname>
-    <surname>Rini</surname>
-    <affiliation>
-     <address>
-      <email>trini@kernel.crashing.org</email>
-     </address>
-    </affiliation>
-   </author>
-  </authorgroup>
-
-  <authorgroup>
-   <author>
-    <firstname>Amit S.</firstname>
-    <surname>Kale</surname>
-    <affiliation>
-     <address>
-      <email>amitkale@linsyssoft.com</email>
-     </address>
-    </affiliation>
-   </author>
-  </authorgroup>
-
   <copyright>
-   <year>2008</year>
+   <year>2008,2010</year>
    <holder>Wind River Systems, Inc.</holder>
   </copyright>
   <copyright>
@@ -69,41 +44,76 @@
   <chapter id="Introduction">
     <title>Introduction</title>
     <para>
-    kgdb is a source level debugger for linux kernel. It is used along
-    with gdb to debug a linux kernel.  The expectation is that gdb can
-    be used to "break in" to the kernel to inspect memory, variables
-    and look through call stack information similar to what an
-    application developer would use gdb for.  It is possible to place
-    breakpoints in kernel code and perform some limited execution
-    stepping.
+    The kernel has two different debugger front ends (kdb and kgdb)
+    which interface to the debug core.  It is possible to use either
+    of the debugger front ends and dynamically transition between them
+    if you configure the kernel properly at compile and runtime.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    Kdb is simplistic shell-style interface which you can use on a
+    system console with a keyboard or serial console.  You can use it
+    to inspect memory, registers, process lists, dmesg, and even set
+    breakpoints to stop in a certain location.  Kdb is not a source
+    level debugger, although you can set breakpoints and execute some
+    basic kernel run control.  Kdb is mainly aimed at doing some
+    analysis to aid in development or diagnosing kernel problems.  You
+    can access some symbols by name in kernel built-ins or in kernel
+    modules if the code was built
+    with <symbol>CONFIG_KALLSYMS</symbol>.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    Kgdb is intended to be used as a source level debugger for the
+    Linux kernel. It is used along with gdb to debug a Linux kernel.
+    The expectation is that gdb can be used to "break in" to the
+    kernel to inspect memory, variables and look through call stack
+    information similar to the way an application developer would use
+    gdb to debug an application.  It is possible to place breakpoints
+    in kernel code and perform some limited execution stepping.
     </para>
     <para>
-    Two machines are required for using kgdb. One of these machines is a
-    development machine and the other is a test machine.  The kernel
-    to be debugged runs on the test machine. The development machine
-    runs an instance of gdb against the vmlinux file which contains
-    the symbols (not boot image such as bzImage, zImage, uImage...).
-    In gdb the developer specifies the connection parameters and
-    connects to kgdb.  The type of connection a developer makes with
-    gdb depends on the availability of kgdb I/O modules compiled as
-    builtin's or kernel modules in the test machine's kernel.
+    Two machines are required for using kgdb. One of these machines is
+    a development machine and the other is the target machine.  The
+    kernel to be debugged runs on the target machine. The development
+    machine runs an instance of gdb against the vmlinux file which
+    contains the symbols (not boot image such as bzImage, zImage,
+    uImage...).  In gdb the developer specifies the connection
+    parameters and connects to kgdb.  The type of connection a
+    developer makes with gdb depends on the availability of kgdb I/O
+    modules compiled as built-ins or loadable kernel modules in the test
+    machine's kernel.
     </para>
   </chapter>
   <chapter id="CompilingAKernel">
-    <title>Compiling a kernel</title>
+  <title>Compiling a kernel</title>
+  <para>
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para>In order to enable compilation of kdb, you must first enable kgdb.</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>The kgdb test compile options are described in the kgdb test suite chapter.</para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+  </para>
+  <sect1 id="CompileKGDB">
+    <title>Kernel config options for kgdb</title>
     <para>
     To enable <symbol>CONFIG_KGDB</symbol> you should first turn on
     "Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers"
     (CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL) in  "General setup", then under the
-    "Kernel debugging" select "KGDB: kernel debugging with remote gdb".
+    "Kernel debugging" select "KGDB: kernel debugger".
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    While it is not a hard requirement that you have symbols in your
+    vmlinux file, gdb tends not to be very useful without the symbolic
+    data, so you will want to turn
+    on <symbol>CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO</symbol> which is called "Compile the
+    kernel with debug info" in the config menu.
     </para>
     <para>
     It is advised, but not required that you turn on the
-    CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER kernel option.  This option inserts code to
-    into the compiled executable which saves the frame information in
-    registers or on the stack at different points which will allow a
-    debugger such as gdb to more accurately construct stack back traces
-    while debugging the kernel.
+    <symbol>CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER</symbol> kernel option which is called "Compile the
+    kernel with frame pointers" in the config menu.  This option
+    inserts code to into the compiled executable which saves the frame
+    information in registers or on the stack at different points which
+    allows a debugger such as gdb to more accurately construct
+    stack back traces while debugging the kernel.
     </para>
     <para>
     If the architecture that you are using supports the kernel option
@@ -116,38 +126,160 @@
     this option.
     </para>
     <para>
-    Next you should choose one of more I/O drivers to interconnect debugging
-    host and debugged target.  Early boot debugging requires a KGDB
-    I/O driver that supports early debugging and the driver must be
-    built into the kernel directly. Kgdb I/O driver configuration
-    takes place via kernel or module parameters, see following
-    chapter.
+    Next you should choose one of more I/O drivers to interconnect
+    debugging host and debugged target.  Early boot debugging requires
+    a KGDB I/O driver that supports early debugging and the driver
+    must be built into the kernel directly. Kgdb I/O driver
+    configuration takes place via kernel or module parameters which
+    you can learn more about in the in the section that describes the
+    parameter "kgdboc".
     </para>
-    <para>
-    The kgdb test compile options are described in the kgdb test suite chapter.
+    <para>Here is an example set of .config symbols to enable or
+    disable for kgdb:
+    <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem><para># CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA is not set</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE=y</para></listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
     </para>
-
+  </sect1>
+  <sect1 id="CompileKDB">
+    <title>Kernel config options for kdb</title>
+    <para>Kdb is quite a bit more complex than the simple gdbstub
+    sitting on top of the kernel's debug core.  Kdb must implement a
+    shell, and also adds some helper functions in other parts of the
+    kernel, responsible for printing out interesting data such as what
+    you would see if you ran "lsmod", or "ps".  In order to build kdb
+    into the kernel you follow the same steps as you would for kgdb.
+    </para>
+    <para>The main config option for kdb
+    is <symbol>CONFIG_KGDB_KDB</symbol> which is called "KGDB_KDB:
+    include kdb frontend for kgdb" in the config menu.  In theory you
+    would have already also selected an I/O driver such as the
+    CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE interface if you plan on using kdb on a
+    serial port, when you were configuring kgdb.
+    </para>
+    <para>If you want to use a PS/2-style keyboard with kdb, you would
+    select CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD which is called "KGDB_KDB: keyboard as
+    input device" in the config menu.  The CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD option
+    is not used for anything in the gdb interface to kgdb.  The
+    CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD option only works with kdb.
+    </para>
+    <para>Here is an example set of .config symbols to enable/disable kdb:
+    <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem><para># CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA is not set</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB_KDB=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD=y</para></listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
   </chapter>
-  <chapter id="EnableKGDB">
-   <title>Enable kgdb for debugging</title>
-   <para>
-   In order to use kgdb you must activate it by passing configuration
-   information to one of the kgdb I/O drivers.  If you do not pass any
-   configuration information kgdb will not do anything at all.  Kgdb
-   will only actively hook up to the kernel trap hooks if a kgdb I/O
-   driver is loaded and configured.  If you unconfigure a kgdb I/O
-   driver, kgdb will unregister all the kernel hook points.
+  <chapter id="kgdbKernelArgs">
+  <title>Kernel Debugger Boot Arguments</title>
+  <para>This section describes the various runtime kernel
+  parameters that affect the configuration of the kernel debugger.
+  The following chapter covers using kdb and kgdb as well as
+  provides some examples of the configuration parameters.</para>
+   <sect1 id="kgdboc">
+   <title>Kernel parameter: kgdboc</title>
+   <para>The kgdboc driver was originally an abbreviation meant to
+   stand for "kgdb over console".  Today it is the primary mechanism
+   to configure how to communicate from gdb to kgdb as well as the
+   devices you want to use to interact with the kdb shell.
+   </para>
+   <para>For kgdb/gdb, kgdboc is designed to work with a single serial
+   port. It is intended to cover the circumstance where you want to
+   use a serial console as your primary console as well as using it to
+   perform kernel debugging.  It is also possible to use kgdb on a
+   serial port which is not designated as a system console.  Kgdboc
+   may be configured as a kernel built-in or a kernel loadable module.
+   You can only make use of <constant>kgdbwait</constant> and early
+   debugging if you build kgdboc into the kernel as a built-in.
    </para>
+   <sect2 id="kgdbocArgs">
+   <title>kgdboc arguments</title>
+   <para>Usage: <constant>kgdboc=[kbd][[,]serial_device][,baud]</constant></para>
+   <sect3 id="kgdbocArgs1">
+   <title>Using loadable module or built-in</title>
    <para>
-   All drivers can be reconfigured at run time, if
-   <symbol>CONFIG_SYSFS</symbol> and <symbol>CONFIG_MODULES</symbol>
-   are enabled, by echo'ing a new config string to
-   <constant>/sys/module/&lt;driver&gt;/parameter/&lt;option&gt;</constant>.
-   The driver can be unconfigured by passing an empty string.  You cannot
-   change the configuration while the debugger is attached.  Make sure
-   to detach the debugger with the <constant>detach</constant> command
-   prior to trying unconfigure a kgdb I/O driver.
+   <orderedlist>
+   <listitem><para>As a kernel built-in:</para>
+   <para>Use the kernel boot argument: <constant>kgdboc=&lt;tty-device&gt;,[baud]</constant></para></listitem>
+   <listitem>
+   <para>As a kernel loadable module:</para>
+   <para>Use the command: <constant>modprobe kgdboc kgdboc=&lt;tty-device&gt;,[baud]</constant></para>
+   <para>Here are two examples of how you might formate the kgdboc
+   string. The first is for an x86 target using the first serial port.
+   The second example is for the ARM Versatile AB using the second
+   serial port.
+   <orderedlist>
+   <listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para></listitem>
+   <listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=ttyAMA1,115200</constant></para></listitem>
+   </orderedlist>
    </para>
+   </listitem>
+   </orderedlist></para>
+   </sect3>
+   <sect3 id="kgdbocArgs2">
+   <title>Configure kgdboc at runtime with sysfs</title>
+   <para>At run time you can enable or disable kgdboc by echoing a
+   parameters into the sysfs.  Here are two examples:</para>
+   <orderedlist>
+   <listitem><para>Enable kgdboc on ttyS0</para>
+   <para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
+   <listitem><para>Disable kgdboc</para>
+   <para><constant>echo "" &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
+   </orderedlist>
+   <para>NOTE: You do not need to specify the baud if you are
+   configuring the console on tty which is already configured or
+   open.</para>
+   </sect3>
+   <sect3 id="kgdbocArgs3">
+   <title>More examples</title>
+   <para>You can configure kgdboc to use the keyboard, and or a serial device
+   depending on if you are using kdb and or kgdb, in one of the
+   following scenarios.
+   <orderedlist>
+   <listitem><para>kdb and kgdb over only a serial port</para>
+   <para><constant>kgdboc=&lt;serial_device&gt;[,baud]</constant></para>
+   <para>Example: <constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem><para>kdb and kgdb with keyboard and a serial port</para>
+   <para><constant>kgdboc=kbd,&lt;serial_device&gt;[,baud]</constant></para>
+   <para>Example: <constant>kgdboc=kbd,ttyS0,115200</constant></para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem><para>kdb with a keyboard</para>
+   <para><constant>kgdboc=kbd</constant></para>
+   </listitem>
+   </orderedlist>
+   </para>
+   </sect3>
+   <para>NOTE: Kgdboc does not support interrupting the target via the
+   gdb remote protocol.  You must manually send a sysrq-g unless you
+   have a proxy that splits console output to a terminal program.
+   A console proxy has a separate TCP port for the debugger and a separate
+   TCP port for the "human" console.  The proxy can take care of sending
+   the sysrq-g for you.
+   </para>
+   <para>When using kgdboc with no debugger proxy, you can end up
+    connecting the debugger at one of two entry points.  If an
+    exception occurs after you have loaded kgdboc, a message should
+    print on the console stating it is waiting for the debugger.  In
+    this case you disconnect your terminal program and then connect the
+    debugger in its place.  If you want to interrupt the target system
+    and forcibly enter a debug session you have to issue a Sysrq
+    sequence and then type the letter <constant>g</constant>.  Then
+    you disconnect the terminal session and connect gdb.  Your options
+    if you don't like this are to hack gdb to send the sysrq-g for you
+    as well as on the initial connect, or to use a debugger proxy that
+    allows an unmodified gdb to do the debugging.
+   </para>
+   </sect2>
+   </sect1>
    <sect1 id="kgdbwait">
    <title>Kernel parameter: kgdbwait</title>
    <para>
@@ -162,103 +294,204 @@
    </para>
    <para>
    The kernel will stop and wait as early as the I/O driver and
-   architecture will allow when you use this option.  If you build the
-   kgdb I/O driver as a kernel module kgdbwait will not do anything.
+   architecture allows when you use this option.  If you build the
+   kgdb I/O driver as a loadable kernel module kgdbwait will not do
+   anything.
    </para>
    </sect1>
-  <sect1 id="kgdboc">
-  <title>Kernel parameter: kgdboc</title>
-  <para>
-  The kgdboc driver was originally an abbreviation meant to stand for
-  "kgdb over console".  Kgdboc is designed to work with a single
-  serial port. It was meant to cover the circumstance
-  where you wanted to use a serial console as your primary console as
-  well as using it to perform kernel debugging.  Of course you can
-  also use kgdboc without assigning a console to the same port.
+   <sect1 id="kgdbcon">
+   <title>Kernel parameter: kgdbcon</title>
+   <para> The kgdbcon feature allows you to see printk() messages
+   inside gdb while gdb is connected to the kernel.  Kdb does not make
+    use of the kgdbcon feature.
+   </para>
+   <para>Kgdb supports using the gdb serial protocol to send console
+   messages to the debugger when the debugger is connected and running.
+   There are two ways to activate this feature.
+   <orderedlist>
+   <listitem><para>Activate with the kernel command line option:</para>
+   <para><constant>kgdbcon</constant></para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem><para>Use sysfs before configuring an I/O driver</para>
+   <para>
+   <constant>echo 1 &gt; /sys/module/kgdb/parameters/kgdb_use_con</constant>
+   </para>
+   <para>
+   NOTE: If you do this after you configure the kgdb I/O driver, the
+   setting will not take effect until the next point the I/O is
+   reconfigured.
+   </para>
+   </listitem>
+   </orderedlist>
+   <para>IMPORTANT NOTE: You cannot use kgdboc + kgdbcon on a tty that is an
+   active system console.  An example incorrect usage is <constant>console=ttyS0,115200 kgdboc=ttyS0 kgdbcon</constant>
+   </para>
+   <para>It is possible to use this option with kgdboc on a tty that is not a system console.
+   </para>
   </para>
-  <sect2 id="UsingKgdboc">
-  <title>Using kgdboc</title>
-  <para>
-  You can configure kgdboc via sysfs or a module or kernel boot line
-  parameter depending on if you build with CONFIG_KGDBOC as a module
-  or built-in.
-  <orderedlist>
-  <listitem><para>From the module load or build-in</para>
-  <para><constant>kgdboc=&lt;tty-device&gt;,[baud]</constant></para>
+  </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="usingKDB">
+  <title>Using kdb</title>
   <para>
-  The example here would be if your console port was typically ttyS0, you would use something like <constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant> or on the ARM Versatile AB you would likely use <constant>kgdboc=ttyAMA0,115200</constant>
+  </para>
+  <sect1 id="quickKDBserial">
+  <title>Quick start for kdb on a serial port</title>
+  <para>This is a quick example of how to use kdb.</para>
+  <para><orderedlist>
+  <listitem><para>Boot kernel with arguments:
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para><constant>console=ttyS0,115200 kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist></para>
+  <para>OR</para>
+  <para>Configure kgdboc after the kernel booted; assuming you are using a serial port console:
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
   </para>
   </listitem>
-  <listitem><para>From sysfs</para>
-  <para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para>
+  <listitem><para>Enter the kernel debugger manually or by waiting for an oops or fault.  There are several ways you can enter the kernel debugger manually; all involve using the sysrq-g, which means you must have enabled CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ=y in your kernel config.</para>
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para>When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run:</para>
+   <para><constant>echo g &gt; /proc/sysrq-trigger</constant></para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Example using minicom 2.2</para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Control-a</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>f</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
   </listitem>
-  </orderedlist>
-  </para>
-  <para>
-  NOTE: Kgdboc does not support interrupting the target via the
-  gdb remote protocol.  You must manually send a sysrq-g unless you
-  have a proxy that splits console output to a terminal problem and
-  has a separate port for the debugger to connect to that sends the
-  sysrq-g for you.
+  <listitem><para>When you have telneted to a terminal server that supports sending a remote break</para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Control-]</constant></para>
+  <para>Type in:<constant>send break</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Enter</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
+  </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem><para>From the kdb prompt you can run the "help" command to see a complete list of the commands that are available.</para>
+  <para>Some useful commands in kdb include:
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para>lsmod  -- Shows where kernel modules are loaded</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>ps -- Displays only the active processes</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>ps A -- Shows all the processes</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>summary -- Shows kernel version info and memory usage</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>bt -- Get a backtrace of the current process using dump_stack()</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>dmesg -- View the kernel syslog buffer</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>go -- Continue the system</para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
   </para>
-  <para>When using kgdboc with no debugger proxy, you can end up
-  connecting the debugger for one of two entry points.  If an
-  exception occurs after you have loaded kgdboc a message should print
-  on the console stating it is waiting for the debugger.  In case you
-  disconnect your terminal program and then connect the debugger in
-  its place.  If you want to interrupt the target system and forcibly
-  enter a debug session you have to issue a Sysrq sequence and then
-  type the letter <constant>g</constant>.  Then you disconnect the
-  terminal session and connect gdb.  Your options if you don't like
-  this are to hack gdb to send the sysrq-g for you as well as on the
-  initial connect, or to use a debugger proxy that allows an
-  unmodified gdb to do the debugging.
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem>
+  <para>When you are done using kdb you need to consider rebooting the
+  system or using the "go" command to resuming normal kernel
+  execution.  If you have paused the kernel for a lengthy period of
+  time, applications that rely on timely networking or anything to do
+  with real wall clock time could be adversely affected, so you
+  should take this into consideration when using the kernel
+  debugger.</para>
+  </listitem>
+  </orderedlist></para>
+  </sect1>
+  <sect1 id="quickKDBkeyboard">
+  <title>Quick start for kdb using a keyboard connected console</title>
+  <para>This is a quick example of how to use kdb with a keyboard.</para>
+  <para><orderedlist>
+  <listitem><para>Boot kernel with arguments:
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=kbd</constant></para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist></para>
+  <para>OR</para>
+  <para>Configure kgdboc after the kernel booted:
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para><constant>echo kbd &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
   </para>
-  </sect2>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Enter the kernel debugger manually or by waiting for an oops or fault.  There are several ways you can enter the kernel debugger manually; all involve using the sysrq-g, which means you must have enabled CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ=y in your kernel config.</para>
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para>When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run:</para>
+   <para><constant>echo g &gt; /proc/sysrq-trigger</constant></para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Example using a laptop keyboard</para>
+  <para>Press and hold down: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
+  <para>Press and hold down: <constant>Fn</constant></para>
+  <para>Press and release the key with the label: <constant>SysRq</constant></para>
+  <para>Release: <constant>Fn</constant></para>
+  <para>Press and release: <constant>g</constant></para>
+  <para>Release: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Example using a PS/2 101-key keyboard</para>
+  <para>Press and hold down: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
+  <para>Press and release the key with the label: <constant>SysRq</constant></para>
+  <para>Press and release: <constant>g</constant></para>
+  <para>Release: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
+  </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem>
+  <para>Now type in a kdb command such as "help", "dmesg", "bt" or "go" to continue kernel execution.</para>
+  </listitem>
+  </orderedlist></para>
   </sect1>
-  <sect1 id="kgdbcon">
-  <title>Kernel parameter: kgdbcon</title>
-  <para>
-  Kgdb supports using the gdb serial protocol to send console messages
-  to the debugger when the debugger is connected and running.  There
-  are two ways to activate this feature.
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="EnableKGDB">
+   <title>Using kgdb / gdb</title>
+   <para>In order to use kgdb you must activate it by passing
+   configuration information to one of the kgdb I/O drivers.  If you
+   do not pass any configuration information kgdb will not do anything
+   at all.  Kgdb will only actively hook up to the kernel trap hooks
+   if a kgdb I/O driver is loaded and configured.  If you unconfigure
+   a kgdb I/O driver, kgdb will unregister all the kernel hook points.
+   </para>
+   <para> All kgdb I/O drivers can be reconfigured at run time, if
+   <symbol>CONFIG_SYSFS</symbol> and <symbol>CONFIG_MODULES</symbol>
+   are enabled, by echo'ing a new config string to
+   <constant>/sys/module/&lt;driver&gt;/parameter/&lt;option&gt;</constant>.
+   The driver can be unconfigured by passing an empty string.  You cannot
+   change the configuration while the debugger is attached.  Make sure
+   to detach the debugger with the <constant>detach</constant> command
+   prior to trying to unconfigure a kgdb I/O driver.
+   </para>
+  <sect1 id="ConnectingGDB">
+  <title>Connecting with gdb to a serial port</title>
   <orderedlist>
-  <listitem><para>Activate with the kernel command line option:</para>
-  <para><constant>kgdbcon</constant></para>
+  <listitem><para>Configure kgdboc</para>
+   <para>Boot kernel with arguments:
+   <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para></listitem>
+   </itemizedlist></para>
+   <para>OR</para>
+   <para>Configure kgdboc after the kernel booted:
+   <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem><para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
+   </itemizedlist></para>
   </listitem>
-  <listitem><para>Use sysfs before configuring an io driver</para>
-  <para>
-  <constant>echo 1 &gt; /sys/module/kgdb/parameters/kgdb_use_con</constant>
-  </para>
-  <para>
-  NOTE: If you do this after you configure the kgdb I/O driver, the
-  setting will not take effect until the next point the I/O is
-  reconfigured.
-  </para>
+  <listitem>
+  <para>Stop kernel execution (break into the debugger)</para>
+  <para>In order to connect to gdb via kgdboc, the kernel must
+  first be stopped.  There are several ways to stop the kernel which
+  include using kgdbwait as a boot argument, via a sysrq-g, or running
+  the kernel until it takes an exception where it waits for the
+  debugger to attach.
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para>When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run:</para>
+   <para><constant>echo g &gt; /proc/sysrq-trigger</constant></para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Example using minicom 2.2</para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Control-a</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>f</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
   </listitem>
-  </orderedlist>
-  </para>
-  <para>
-  IMPORTANT NOTE: Using this option with kgdb over the console
-  (kgdboc) is not supported.
+  <listitem><para>When you have telneted to a terminal server that supports sending a remote break</para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Control-]</constant></para>
+  <para>Type in:<constant>send break</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Enter</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
+  </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
   </para>
-  </sect1>
-  </chapter>
-  <chapter id="ConnectingGDB">
-  <title>Connecting gdb</title>
-    <para>
-    If you are using kgdboc, you need to have used kgdbwait as a boot
-    argument, issued a sysrq-g, or the system you are going to debug
-    has already taken an exception and is waiting for the debugger to
-    attach before you can connect gdb.
-    </para>
-    <para>
-    If you are not using different kgdb I/O driver other than kgdboc,
-    you should be able to connect and the target will automatically
-    respond.
-    </para>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem>
+    <para>Connect from from gdb</para>
     <para>
-    Example (using a serial port):
+    Example (using a directly connected port):
     </para>
     <programlisting>
     % gdb ./vmlinux
@@ -266,7 +499,7 @@
     (gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0
     </programlisting>
     <para>
-    Example (kgdb to a terminal server on tcp port 2012):
+    Example (kgdb to a terminal server on TCP port 2012):
     </para>
     <programlisting>
     % gdb ./vmlinux
@@ -283,6 +516,83 @@
     communications.  You do this prior to issuing the <constant>target
     remote</constant> command by typing in: <constant>set debug remote 1</constant>
     </para>
+  </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+  <para>Remember if you continue in gdb, and need to "break in" again,
+  you need to issue an other sysrq-g.  It is easy to create a simple
+  entry point by putting a breakpoint at <constant>sys_sync</constant>
+  and then you can run "sync" from a shell or script to break into the
+  debugger.</para>
+  </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="switchKdbKgdb">
+  <title>kgdb and kdb interoperability</title>
+  <para>It is possible to transition between kdb and kgdb dynamically.
+  The debug core will remember which you used the last time and
+  automatically start in the same mode.</para>
+  <sect1>
+  <title>Switching between kdb and kgdb</title>
+  <sect2>
+  <title>Switching from kgdb to kdb</title>
+  <para>
+  There are two ways to switch from kgdb to kdb: you can use gdb to
+  issue a maintenance packet, or you can blindly type the command $3#33.
+  Whenever kernel debugger stops in kgdb mode it will print the
+  message <constant>KGDB or $3#33 for KDB</constant>.  It is important
+  to note that you have to type the sequence correctly in one pass.
+  You cannot type a backspace or delete because kgdb will interpret
+  that as part of the debug stream.
+  <orderedlist>
+  <listitem><para>Change from kgdb to kdb by blindly typing:</para>
+  <para><constant>$3#33</constant></para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Change from kgdb to kdb with gdb</para>
+  <para><constant>maintenance packet 3</constant></para>
+  <para>NOTE: Now you must kill gdb. Typically you press control-z and
+  issue the command: kill -9 %</para></listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+  </para>
+  </sect2>
+  <sect2>
+  <title>Change from kdb to kgdb</title>
+  <para>There are two ways you can change from kdb to kgdb.  You can
+  manually enter kgdb mode by issuing the kgdb command from the kdb
+  shell prompt, or you can connect gdb while the kdb shell prompt is
+  active.  The kdb shell looks for the typical first commands that gdb
+  would issue with the gdb remote protocol and if it sees one of those
+  commands it automatically changes into kgdb mode.</para>
+  <orderedlist>
+  <listitem><para>From kdb issue the command:</para>
+  <para><constant>kgdb</constant></para>
+  <para>Now disconnect your terminal program and connect gdb in its place</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>At the kdb prompt, disconnect the terminal program and connect gdb in its place.</para></listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+  </sect2>
+  </sect1>
+  <sect1>
+  <title>Running kdb commands from gdb</title>
+  <para>It is possible to run a limited set of kdb commands from gdb,
+  using the gdb monitor command.  You don't want to execute any of the
+  run control or breakpoint operations, because it can disrupt the
+  state of the kernel debugger.  You should be using gdb for
+  breakpoints and run control operations if you have gdb connected.
+  The more useful commands to run are things like lsmod, dmesg, ps or
+  possibly some of the memory information commands.  To see all the kdb
+  commands you can run <constant>monitor help</constant>.</para>
+  <para>Example:
+  <informalexample><programlisting>
+(gdb) monitor ps
+1 idle process (state I) and
+27 sleeping system daemon (state M) processes suppressed,
+use 'ps A' to see all.
+Task Addr       Pid   Parent [*] cpu State Thread     Command
+
+0xc78291d0        1        0  0    0   S  0xc7829404  init
+0xc7954150      942        1  0    0   S  0xc7954384  dropbear
+0xc78789c0      944        1  0    0   S  0xc7878bf4  sh
+(gdb)
+  </programlisting></informalexample>
+  </para>
+  </sect1>
   </chapter>
   <chapter id="KGDBTestSuite">
     <title>kgdb Test Suite</title>
@@ -309,34 +619,36 @@
     </para>
   </chapter>
   <chapter id="CommonBackEndReq">
-  <title>KGDB Internals</title>
+  <title>Kernel Debugger Internals</title>
   <sect1 id="kgdbArchitecture">
     <title>Architecture Specifics</title>
       <para>
-      Kgdb is organized into three basic components:
+      The kernel debugger is organized into a number of components:
       <orderedlist>
-      <listitem><para>kgdb core</para>
+      <listitem><para>The debug core</para>
       <para>
-      The kgdb core is found in kernel/kgdb.c.  It contains:
+      The debug core is found in kernel/debugger/debug_core.c.  It contains:
       <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem><para>All the logic to implement the gdb serial protocol</para></listitem>
-      <listitem><para>A generic OS exception handler which includes sync'ing the processors into a stopped state on an multi cpu system.</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>A generic OS exception handler which includes
+      sync'ing the processors into a stopped state on an multi-CPU
+      system.</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>The API to talk to the kgdb I/O drivers</para></listitem>
-      <listitem><para>The API to make calls to the arch specific kgdb implementation</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>The API to make calls to the arch-specific kgdb implementation</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>The logic to perform safe memory reads and writes to memory while using the debugger</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>A full implementation for software breakpoints unless overridden by the arch</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>The API to invoke either the kdb or kgdb frontend to the debug core.</para></listitem>
       </itemizedlist>
       </para>
       </listitem>
-      <listitem><para>kgdb arch specific implementation</para>
+      <listitem><para>kgdb arch-specific implementation</para>
       <para>
       This implementation is generally found in arch/*/kernel/kgdb.c.
       As an example, arch/x86/kernel/kgdb.c contains the specifics to
       implement HW breakpoint as well as the initialization to
       dynamically register and unregister for the trap handlers on
-      this architecture.  The arch specific portion implements:
+      this architecture.  The arch-specific portion implements:
       <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem><para>contains an arch specific trap catcher which
+      <listitem><para>contains an arch-specific trap catcher which
       invokes kgdb_handle_exception() to start kgdb about doing its
       work</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>translation to and from gdb specific packet format to pt_regs</para></listitem>
@@ -347,11 +659,35 @@
       </itemizedlist>
       </para>
       </listitem>
+      <listitem><para>gdbstub frontend (aka kgdb)</para>
+      <para>The gdbstub is located in kernel/debug/gdbstub.c. It contains:</para>
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem><para>All the logic to implement the gdb serial protocol</para></listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem><para>kdb frontend</para>
+      <para>The kdb debugger shell is broken down into a number of
+      components.  The kdb core is located in kernel/debug/kdb.  There
+      are a number of helper functions in some of the other kernel
+      components to make it possible for kdb to examine and report
+      information about the kernel without taking locks that could
+      cause a kernel deadlock.  The kdb core contains implements the following functionality.</para>
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem><para>A simple shell</para></listitem>
+        <listitem><para>The kdb core command set</para></listitem>
+        <listitem><para>A registration API to register additional kdb shell commands.</para>
+        <para>A good example of a self-contained kdb module is the "ftdump" command for dumping the ftrace buffer.  See: kernel/trace/trace_kdb.c</para></listitem>
+        <listitem><para>The implementation for kdb_printf() which
+        emits messages directly to I/O drivers, bypassing the kernel
+        log.</para></listitem>
+        <listitem><para>SW / HW breakpoint management for the kdb shell</para></listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
       <listitem><para>kgdb I/O driver</para>
       <para>
-      Each kgdb I/O driver has to provide an implemenation for the following:
+      Each kgdb I/O driver has to provide an implementation for the following:
       <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem><para>configuration via builtin or module</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>configuration via built-in or module</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>dynamic configuration and kgdb hook registration calls</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>read and write character interface</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>A cleanup handler for unconfiguring from the kgdb core</para></listitem>
@@ -416,15 +752,15 @@
   underlying low level to the hardware driver having "polling hooks"
   which the to which the tty driver is attached.  In the initial
   implementation of kgdboc it the serial_core was changed to expose a
-  low level uart hook for doing polled mode reading and writing of a
+  low level UART hook for doing polled mode reading and writing of a
   single character while in an atomic context.  When kgdb makes an I/O
   request to the debugger, kgdboc invokes a call back in the serial
-  core which in turn uses the call back in the uart driver.  It is
-  certainly possible to extend kgdboc to work with non-uart based
+  core which in turn uses the call back in the UART driver.  It is
+  certainly possible to extend kgdboc to work with non-UART based
   consoles in the future.
   </para>
   <para>
-  When using kgdboc with a uart, the uart driver must implement two callbacks in the <constant>struct uart_ops</constant>. Example from drivers/8250.c:<programlisting>
+  When using kgdboc with a UART, the UART driver must implement two callbacks in the <constant>struct uart_ops</constant>. Example from drivers/8250.c:<programlisting>
 #ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL
 	.poll_get_char = serial8250_get_poll_char,
 	.poll_put_char = serial8250_put_poll_char,
@@ -434,7 +770,7 @@
   <constant>#ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL</constant>, as shown above.
   Keep in mind that polling hooks have to be implemented in such a way
   that they can be called from an atomic context and have to restore
-  the state of the uart chip on return such that the system can return
+  the state of the UART chip on return such that the system can return
   to normal when the debugger detaches.  You need to be very careful
   with any kind of lock you consider, because failing here is most
   going to mean pressing the reset button.
@@ -453,6 +789,10 @@
 		<itemizedlist>
 		<listitem><para>Jason Wessel<email>jason.wessel@windriver.com</email></para></listitem>
 		</itemizedlist>
+                In Jan 2010 this document was updated to include kdb.
+		<itemizedlist>
+		<listitem><para>Jason Wessel<email>jason.wessel@windriver.com</email></para></listitem>
+		</itemizedlist>
 	</para>
   </chapter>
 </book>

Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl

@@ -81,16 +81,14 @@ void (*port_disable) (struct ata_port *);
 	</programlisting>
 
 	<para>
-	Called from ata_bus_probe() and ata_bus_reset() error paths,
-	as well as when unregistering from the SCSI module (rmmod, hot
-	unplug).
+	Called from ata_bus_probe() error path, as well as when
+	unregistering from the SCSI module (rmmod, hot unplug).
 	This function should do whatever needs to be done to take the
 	port out of use.  In most cases, ata_port_disable() can be used
 	as this hook.
 	</para>
 	<para>
 	Called from ata_bus_probe() on a failed probe.
-	Called from ata_bus_reset() on a failed bus reset.
 	Called from ata_scsi_release().
 	</para>
 
@@ -227,6 +225,18 @@ u8   (*sff_check_altstatus)(struct ata_port *ap);
 
 	</sect2>
 
+	<sect2><title>Write specific ATA shadow register</title>
+	<programlisting>
+void (*sff_set_devctl)(struct ata_port *ap, u8 ctl);
+	</programlisting>
+
+	<para>
+	Write the device control ATA shadow register to the hardware.
+	Most drivers don't need to define this.
+	</para>
+
+	</sect2>
+
 	<sect2><title>Select ATA device on bus</title>
 	<programlisting>
 void (*sff_dev_select)(struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int device);
@@ -477,7 +487,7 @@ void (*host_stop) (struct ata_host_set *host_set);
 	allocates space for a legacy IDE PRD table and returns.
 	</para>
 	<para>
-	->port_stop() is called after ->host_stop().  It's sole function
+	->port_stop() is called after ->host_stop().  Its sole function
 	is to release DMA/memory resources, now that they are no longer
 	actively being used.  Many drivers also free driver-private
 	data from port at this time.

Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl

@@ -17,6 +17,7 @@
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-DBG-G-REGISTER "<link linkend='vidioc-dbg-g-register'><constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_REGISTER</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-DBG-S-REGISTER "<link linkend='vidioc-dbg-g-register'><constant>VIDIOC_DBG_S_REGISTER</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-DQBUF "<link linkend='vidioc-qbuf'><constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant></link>">
+<!ENTITY VIDIOC-DQEVENT "<link linkend='vidioc-dqevent'><constant>VIDIOC_DQEVENT</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-ENCODER-CMD "<link linkend='vidioc-encoder-cmd'><constant>VIDIOC_ENCODER_CMD</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-ENUMAUDIO "<link linkend='vidioc-enumaudio'><constant>VIDIOC_ENUMAUDIO</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-ENUMAUDOUT "<link linkend='vidioc-enumaudioout'><constant>VIDIOC_ENUMAUDOUT</constant></link>">
@@ -60,6 +61,7 @@
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-REQBUFS "<link linkend='vidioc-reqbufs'><constant>VIDIOC_REQBUFS</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-STREAMOFF "<link linkend='vidioc-streamon'><constant>VIDIOC_STREAMOFF</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-STREAMON "<link linkend='vidioc-streamon'><constant>VIDIOC_STREAMON</constant></link>">
+<!ENTITY VIDIOC-SUBSCRIBE-EVENT "<link linkend='vidioc-subscribe-event'><constant>VIDIOC_SUBSCRIBE_EVENT</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-S-AUDIO "<link linkend='vidioc-g-audio'><constant>VIDIOC_S_AUDIO</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-S-AUDOUT "<link linkend='vidioc-g-audioout'><constant>VIDIOC_S_AUDOUT</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-S-CROP "<link linkend='vidioc-g-crop'><constant>VIDIOC_S_CROP</constant></link>">
@@ -83,6 +85,7 @@
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-TRY-ENCODER-CMD "<link linkend='vidioc-encoder-cmd'><constant>VIDIOC_TRY_ENCODER_CMD</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-TRY-EXT-CTRLS "<link linkend='vidioc-g-ext-ctrls'><constant>VIDIOC_TRY_EXT_CTRLS</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-TRY-FMT "<link linkend='vidioc-g-fmt'><constant>VIDIOC_TRY_FMT</constant></link>">
+<!ENTITY VIDIOC-UNSUBSCRIBE-EVENT "<link linkend='vidioc-subscribe-event'><constant>VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT</constant></link>">
 
 <!-- Types -->
 <!ENTITY v4l2-std-id "<link linkend='v4l2-std-id'>v4l2_std_id</link>">
@@ -141,6 +144,9 @@
 <!ENTITY v4l2-enc-idx "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-enc-idx'>v4l2_enc_idx</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-enc-idx-entry "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-enc-idx-entry'>v4l2_enc_idx_entry</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-encoder-cmd "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-encoder-cmd'>v4l2_encoder_cmd</link>">
+<!ENTITY v4l2-event "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-event'>v4l2_event</link>">
+<!ENTITY v4l2-event-subscription "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-event-subscription'>v4l2_event_subscription</link>">
+<!ENTITY v4l2-event-vsync "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-event-vsync'>v4l2_event_vsync</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-ext-control "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-ext-control'>v4l2_ext_control</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-ext-controls "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-ext-controls'>v4l2_ext_controls</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-fmtdesc "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-fmtdesc'>v4l2_fmtdesc</link>">
@@ -200,6 +206,7 @@
 <!ENTITY sub-controls SYSTEM "v4l/controls.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-capture SYSTEM "v4l/dev-capture.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-codec SYSTEM "v4l/dev-codec.xml">
+<!ENTITY sub-dev-event SYSTEM "v4l/dev-event.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-effect SYSTEM "v4l/dev-effect.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-osd SYSTEM "v4l/dev-osd.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-output SYSTEM "v4l/dev-output.xml">
@@ -292,6 +299,8 @@
 <!ENTITY sub-v4l2grab-c SYSTEM "v4l/v4l2grab.c.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-videodev2-h SYSTEM "v4l/videodev2.h.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-v4l2 SYSTEM "v4l/v4l2.xml">
+<!ENTITY sub-dqevent SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml">
+<!ENTITY sub-subscribe-event SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-intro SYSTEM "dvb/intro.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-frontend SYSTEM "dvb/frontend.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dvbproperty SYSTEM "dvb/dvbproperty.xml">
@@ -381,3 +390,5 @@
 <!ENTITY reqbufs SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml">
 <!ENTITY s-hw-freq-seek SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml">
 <!ENTITY streamon SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-streamon.xml">
+<!ENTITY dqevent SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml">
+<!ENTITY subscribe_event SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml">

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/compat.xml

@@ -2332,15 +2332,26 @@ more information.</para>
 	</listitem>
       </orderedlist>
     </section>
-   </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>V4L2 in Linux 2.6.34</title>
+      <orderedlist>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Added
+<constant>V4L2_CID_IRIS_ABSOLUTE</constant> and
+<constant>V4L2_CID_IRIS_RELATIVE</constant> controls to the
+	    <link linkend="camera-controls">Camera controls class</link>.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </section>
 
-   <section id="other">
-     <title>Relation of V4L2 to other Linux multimedia APIs</title>
+    <section id="other">
+      <title>Relation of V4L2 to other Linux multimedia APIs</title>
 
-    <section id="xvideo">
-      <title>X Video Extension</title>
+      <section id="xvideo">
+        <title>X Video Extension</title>
 
-      <para>The X Video Extension (abbreviated XVideo or just Xv) is
+        <para>The X Video Extension (abbreviated XVideo or just Xv) is
 an extension of the X Window system, implemented for example by the
 XFree86 project. Its scope is similar to V4L2, an API to video capture
 and output devices for X clients. Xv allows applications to display
@@ -2351,7 +2362,7 @@ capture or output still images in XPixmaps<footnote>
 extension available across many operating systems and
 architectures.</para>
 
-      <para>Because the driver is embedded into the X server Xv has a
+        <para>Because the driver is embedded into the X server Xv has a
 number of advantages over the V4L2 <link linkend="overlay">video
 overlay interface</link>. The driver can easily determine the overlay
 target, &ie; visible graphics memory or off-screen buffers for a
@@ -2360,16 +2371,16 @@ overlay, scaling or color-keying, or the clipping functions of the
 video capture hardware, always in sync with drawing operations or
 windows moving or changing their stacking order.</para>
 
-      <para>To combine the advantages of Xv and V4L a special Xv
+        <para>To combine the advantages of Xv and V4L a special Xv
 driver exists in XFree86 and XOrg, just programming any overlay capable
 Video4Linux device it finds. To enable it
 <filename>/etc/X11/XF86Config</filename> must contain these lines:</para>
-      <para><screen>
+        <para><screen>
 Section "Module"
     Load "v4l"
 EndSection</screen></para>
 
-      <para>As of XFree86 4.2 this driver still supports only V4L
+        <para>As of XFree86 4.2 this driver still supports only V4L
 ioctls, however it should work just fine with all V4L2 devices through
 the V4L2 backward-compatibility layer. Since V4L2 permits multiple
 opens it is possible (if supported by the V4L2 driver) to capture
@@ -2377,83 +2388,84 @@ video while an X client requested video overlay. Restrictions of
 simultaneous capturing and overlay are discussed in <xref
 	  linkend="overlay" /> apply.</para>
 
-      <para>Only marginally related to V4L2, XFree86 extended Xv to
+        <para>Only marginally related to V4L2, XFree86 extended Xv to
 support hardware YUV to RGB conversion and scaling for faster video
 playback, and added an interface to MPEG-2 decoding hardware. This API
 is useful to display images captured with V4L2 devices.</para>
-    </section>
+      </section>
 
-    <section>
-      <title>Digital Video</title>
+      <section>
+        <title>Digital Video</title>
 
-      <para>V4L2 does not support digital terrestrial, cable or
+        <para>V4L2 does not support digital terrestrial, cable or
 satellite broadcast. A separate project aiming at digital receivers
 exists. You can find its homepage at <ulink
 url="http://linuxtv.org">http://linuxtv.org</ulink>. The Linux DVB API
 has no connection to the V4L2 API except that drivers for hybrid
 hardware may support both.</para>
-    </section>
+      </section>
 
-    <section>
-      <title>Audio Interfaces</title>
+      <section>
+        <title>Audio Interfaces</title>
 
-      <para>[to do - OSS/ALSA]</para>
+        <para>[to do - OSS/ALSA]</para>
+      </section>
     </section>
-  </section>
 
-  <section id="experimental">
-    <title>Experimental API Elements</title>
+    <section id="experimental">
+      <title>Experimental API Elements</title>
 
-    <para>The following V4L2 API elements are currently experimental
+      <para>The following V4L2 API elements are currently experimental
 and may change in the future.</para>
 
-    <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>Video Output Overlay (OSD) Interface, <xref
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Video Output Overlay (OSD) Interface, <xref
 	    linkend="osd" />.</para>
-      </listitem>
+        </listitem>
 	<listitem>
-	<para><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>,
+	  <para><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>,
 	&v4l2-buf-type;, <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para><constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>,
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para><constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>,
 &VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl, <xref linkend="device-capabilities" />.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>&VIDIOC-ENUM-FRAMESIZES; and
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-ENUM-FRAMESIZES; and
 &VIDIOC-ENUM-FRAMEINTERVALS; ioctls.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>&VIDIOC-G-ENC-INDEX; ioctl.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>&VIDIOC-ENCODER-CMD; and &VIDIOC-TRY-ENCODER-CMD;
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-G-ENC-INDEX; ioctl.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-ENCODER-CMD; and &VIDIOC-TRY-ENCODER-CMD;
 ioctls.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-REGISTER; and &VIDIOC-DBG-S-REGISTER;
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-REGISTER; and &VIDIOC-DBG-S-REGISTER;
 ioctls.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-IDENT; ioctl.</para>
-      </listitem>
-    </itemizedlist>
-  </section>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-IDENT; ioctl.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </section>
 
-  <section id="obsolete">
-    <title>Obsolete API Elements</title>
+    <section id="obsolete">
+      <title>Obsolete API Elements</title>
 
-    <para>The following V4L2 API elements were superseded by new
+      <para>The following V4L2 API elements were superseded by new
 interfaces and should not be implemented in new drivers.</para>
 
-    <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem>
-	<para><constant>VIDIOC_G_MPEGCOMP</constant> and
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para><constant>VIDIOC_G_MPEGCOMP</constant> and
 <constant>VIDIOC_S_MPEGCOMP</constant> ioctls. Use Extended Controls,
 <xref linkend="extended-controls" />.</para>
-      </listitem>
-    </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </section>
   </section>
 
   <!--

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml

@@ -266,6 +266,12 @@ minimum value disables backlight compensation.</entry>
 	    <entry>boolean</entry>
 	    <entry>Chroma automatic gain control.</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_CHROMA_GAIN</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	    <entry>Adjusts the Chroma gain control (for use when chroma AGC
+	    is disabled).</entry>
+	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_COLOR_KILLER</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>boolean</entry>
@@ -277,8 +283,15 @@ minimum value disables backlight compensation.</entry>
 	    <entry>Selects a color effect. Possible values for
 <constant>enum v4l2_colorfx</constant> are:
 <constant>V4L2_COLORFX_NONE</constant> (0),
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_BW</constant> (1) and
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SEPIA</constant> (2).</entry>
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_BW</constant> (1),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SEPIA</constant> (2),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_NEGATIVE</constant> (3),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_EMBOSS</constant> (4),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKETCH</constant> (5),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKY_BLUE</constant> (6),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_GRASS_GREEN</constant> (7),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKIN_WHITEN</constant> (8) and
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_VIVID</constant> (9).</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_ROTATE</constant></entry>
@@ -1824,6 +1837,25 @@ wide-angle direction. The zoom speed unit is driver-specific.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row><entry></entry></row>
 
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_IRIS_ABSOLUTE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">This control sets the
+camera's aperture to the specified value. The unit is undefined.
+Larger values open the iris wider, smaller values close it.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_IRIS_RELATIVE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">This control modifies the
+camera's aperture by the specified amount. The unit is undefined.
+Positive values open the iris one step further, negative values close
+it one step further. This is a write-only control.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
 	  <row>
 	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_PRIVACY</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
 	    <entry>boolean</entry>

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-event.xml

@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+  <title>Event Interface</title>
+
+  <para>The V4L2 event interface provides means for user to get
+  immediately notified on certain conditions taking place on a device.
+  This might include start of frame or loss of signal events, for
+  example.
+  </para>
+
+  <para>To receive events, the events the user is interested in first must
+  be subscribed using the &VIDIOC-SUBSCRIBE-EVENT; ioctl. Once an event is
+  subscribed, the events of subscribed types are dequeueable using the
+  &VIDIOC-DQEVENT; ioctl. Events may be unsubscribed using
+  VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT ioctl. The special event type V4L2_EVENT_ALL may
+  be used to unsubscribe all the events the driver supports.</para>
+
+  <para>The event subscriptions and event queues are specific to file
+  handles. Subscribing an event on one file handle does not affect
+  other file handles.
+  </para>
+
+  <para>The information on dequeueable events is obtained by using select or
+  poll system calls on video devices. The V4L2 events use POLLPRI events on
+  poll system call and exceptions on select system call.  </para>
+
+  <!--
+Local Variables:
+mode: sgml
+sgml-parent-document: "v4l2.sgml"
+indent-tabs-mode: nil
+End:
+  -->

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/io.xml

@@ -701,6 +701,16 @@ buffer cannot be on both queues at the same time, the
 They can be both cleared however, then the buffer is in "dequeued"
 state, in the application domain to say so.</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_ERROR</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0040</entry>
+	    <entry>When this flag is set, the buffer has been dequeued
+	    successfully, although the data might have been corrupted.
+	    This is recoverable, streaming may continue as normal and
+	    the buffer may be reused normally.
+	    Drivers set this flag when the <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant>
+	    ioctl is called.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_KEYFRAME</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>0x0008</entry>
@@ -918,8 +928,8 @@ order</emphasis>.</para>
 
     <para>When the driver provides or accepts images field by field
 rather than interleaved, it is also important applications understand
-how the fields combine to frames. We distinguish between top and
-bottom fields, the <emphasis>spatial order</emphasis>: The first line
+how the fields combine to frames. We distinguish between top (aka odd) and
+bottom (aka even) fields, the <emphasis>spatial order</emphasis>: The first line
 of the top field is the first line of an interlaced frame, the first
 line of the bottom field is the second line of that frame.</para>
 
@@ -972,12 +982,12 @@ between <constant>V4L2_FIELD_TOP</constant> and
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_FIELD_TOP</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>2</entry>
-	    <entry>Images consist of the top field only.</entry>
+	    <entry>Images consist of the top (aka odd) field only.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_FIELD_BOTTOM</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>3</entry>
-	    <entry>Images consist of the bottom field only.
+	    <entry>Images consist of the bottom (aka even) field only.
 Applications may wish to prevent a device from capturing interlaced
 images because they will have "comb" or "feathering" artefacts around
 moving objects.</entry>

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml

@@ -792,6 +792,18 @@ http://www.thedirks.org/winnov/</ulink></para></entry>
 	    <entry>'YYUV'</entry>
 	    <entry>unknown</entry>
 	  </row>
+	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y4">
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y4</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>'Y04 '</entry>
+	    <entry>Old 4-bit greyscale format. Only the least significant 4 bits of each byte are used,
+the other bits are set to 0.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y6">
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y6</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>'Y06 '</entry>
+	    <entry>Old 6-bit greyscale format. Only the least significant 6 bits of each byte are used,
+the other bits are set to 0.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
     </table>

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml

@@ -401,6 +401,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark>
     <section id="ttx"> &sub-dev-teletext; </section>
     <section id="radio"> &sub-dev-radio; </section>
     <section id="rds"> &sub-dev-rds; </section>
+    <section id="event"> &sub-dev-event; </section>
   </chapter>
 
   <chapter id="driver">
@@ -426,6 +427,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark>
     &sub-cropcap;
     &sub-dbg-g-chip-ident;
     &sub-dbg-g-register;
+    &sub-dqevent;
     &sub-encoder-cmd;
     &sub-enumaudio;
     &sub-enumaudioout;
@@ -467,6 +469,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark>
     &sub-reqbufs;
     &sub-s-hw-freq-seek;
     &sub-streamon;
+    &sub-subscribe-event;
     <!-- End of ioctls. -->
     &sub-mmap;
     &sub-munmap;

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml

@@ -1018,6 +1018,13 @@ enum <link linkend="v4l2-colorfx">v4l2_colorfx</link> {
         V4L2_COLORFX_NONE       = 0,
         V4L2_COLORFX_BW         = 1,
         V4L2_COLORFX_SEPIA      = 2,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_NEGATIVE   = 3,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_EMBOSS     = 4,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_SKETCH     = 5,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_SKY_BLUE   = 6,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_GRASS_GREEN = 7,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_SKIN_WHITEN = 8,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_VIVID      = 9.
 };
 #define V4L2_CID_AUTOBRIGHTNESS                 (V4L2_CID_BASE+32)
 #define V4L2_CID_BAND_STOP_FILTER               (V4L2_CID_BASE+33)
@@ -1271,6 +1278,9 @@ enum  <link linkend="v4l2-exposure-auto-type">v4l2_exposure_auto_type</link> {
 
 #define V4L2_CID_PRIVACY                        (V4L2_CID_CAMERA_CLASS_BASE+16)
 
+#define V4L2_CID_IRIS_ABSOLUTE                  (V4L2_CID_CAMERA_CLASS_BASE+17)
+#define V4L2_CID_IRIS_RELATIVE                  (V4L2_CID_CAMERA_CLASS_BASE+18)
+
 /* FM Modulator class control IDs */
 #define V4L2_CID_FM_TX_CLASS_BASE               (V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_FM_TX | 0x900)
 #define V4L2_CID_FM_TX_CLASS                    (V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_FM_TX | 1)

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml

@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-dqevent">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_DQEVENT</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_DQEVENT</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Dequeue event</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_event
+*<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_DQEVENT</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <para>Dequeue an event from a video device. No input is required
+    for this ioctl. All the fields of the &v4l2-event; structure are
+    filled by the driver. The file handle will also receive exceptions
+    which the application may get by e.g. using the select system
+    call.</para>
+
+    <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_event</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="4">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Type of the event.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>union</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>u</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>&v4l2-event-vsync;</entry>
+            <entry><structfield>vsync</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Event data for event V4L2_EVENT_VSYNC.
+            </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>__u8</entry>
+            <entry><structfield>data</structfield>[64]</entry>
+	    <entry>Event data. Defined by the event type. The union
+            should be used to define easily accessible type for
+            events.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>pending</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Number of pending events excluding this one.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>sequence</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Event sequence number. The sequence number is
+	    incremented for every subscribed event that takes place.
+	    If sequence numbers are not contiguous it means that
+	    events have been lost.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>struct timespec</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>timestamp</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Event timestamp.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[9]</entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers must set
+	    the array to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
+<!--
+Local Variables:
+mode: sgml
+sgml-parent-document: "v4l2.sgml"
+indent-tabs-mode: nil
+End:
+-->

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml

@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ input/output interface to linux-media@vger.kernel.org on 19 Oct 2009.
 	    <entry>This input supports setting DV presets by using VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_OUT_CAP_CUSTOM_TIMINGS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_CUSTOM_TIMINGS</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>0x00000002</entry>
 	    <entry>This input supports setting custom video timings by using VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS.</entry>
 	  </row>

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.xml

@@ -111,7 +111,11 @@ from the driver's outgoing queue. They just set the
 and <structfield>reserved</structfield>
 fields of a &v4l2-buffer; as above, when <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant>
 is called with a pointer to this structure the driver fills the
-remaining fields or returns an error code.</para>
+remaining fields or returns an error code. The driver may also set
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_ERROR</constant> in the <structfield>flags</structfield>
+field. It indicates a non-critical (recoverable) streaming error. In such case
+the application may continue as normal, but should be aware that data in the
+dequeued buffer might be corrupted.</para>
 
     <para>By default <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant> blocks when no
 buffer is in the outgoing queue. When the
@@ -158,7 +162,13 @@ enqueue a user pointer buffer.</para>
 	  <para><constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant> failed due to an
 internal error. Can also indicate temporary problems like signal
 loss. Note the driver might dequeue an (empty) buffer despite
-returning an error, or even stop capturing.</para>
+returning an error, or even stop capturing. Reusing such buffer may be unsafe
+though and its details (e.g. <structfield>index</structfield>) may not be
+returned either. It is recommended that drivers indicate recoverable errors
+by setting the <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_ERROR</constant> and returning 0 instead.
+In that case the application should be able to safely reuse the buffer and
+continue streaming.
+	</para>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
     </variablelist>

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml

@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ should be part of the control documentation.</entry>
 	    <entry>n/a</entry>
 	    <entry>This is not a control. When
 <constant>VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL</constant> is called with a control ID
-equal to a control class code (see <xref linkend="ctrl-class" />), the
+equal to a control class code (see <xref linkend="ctrl-class" />) + 1, the
 ioctl returns the name of the control class and this control type.
 Older drivers which do not support this feature return an
 &EINVAL;.</entry>

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml

@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ fields of the <structname>v4l2_requestbuffers</structname> structure.
 They set the <structfield>type</structfield> field to the respective
 stream or buffer type, the <structfield>count</structfield> field to
 the desired number of buffers, <structfield>memory</structfield>
-must be set to the requested I/O method and the reserved array
+must be set to the requested I/O method and the <structfield>reserved</structfield> array
 must be zeroed. When the ioctl
 is called with a pointer to this structure the driver will attempt to allocate
 the requested number of buffers and it stores the actual number

Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml

@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-subscribe-event">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_SUBSCRIBE_EVENT, VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_SUBSCRIBE_EVENT, VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Subscribe or unsubscribe event</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_event_subscription
+*<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_SUBSCRIBE_EVENT, VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <para>Subscribe or unsubscribe V4L2 event. Subscribed events are
+    dequeued by using the &VIDIOC-DQEVENT; ioctl.</para>
+
+    <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event-subscription">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_event_subscription</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Type of the event.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[7]</entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications
+	    must set the array to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+    <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="event-type">
+      <title>Event Types</title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-def;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_ALL</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0</entry>
+	    <entry>All events. V4L2_EVENT_ALL is valid only for
+	    VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT for unsubscribing all events at once.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_VSYNC</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>1</entry>
+	    <entry>This event is triggered on the vertical sync.
+	    This event has &v4l2-event-vsync; associated with it.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_EOS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>2</entry>
+	    <entry>This event is triggered when the end of a stream is reached.
+	    This is typically used with MPEG decoders to report to the application
+	    when the last of the MPEG stream has been decoded.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_PRIVATE_START</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x08000000</entry>
+	    <entry>Base event number for driver-private events.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+    <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event-vsync">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_event_vsync</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u8</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>field</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>The upcoming field. See &v4l2-field;.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
+<!--
+Local Variables:
+mode: sgml
+sgml-parent-document: "v4l2.sgml"
+indent-tabs-mode: nil
+End:
+-->

Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl

@@ -5518,34 +5518,41 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
 ]]>
         </programlisting>
       </informalexample>
+
+      For the raw data, <structfield>size</structfield> field must be
+      set properly.  This specifies the maximum size of the proc file access.
     </para>
 
     <para>
-      The callback is much more complicated than the text-file
-      version. You need to use a low-level I/O functions such as
+      The read/write callbacks of raw mode are more direct than the text mode.
+      You need to use a low-level I/O functions such as
       <function>copy_from/to_user()</function> to transfer the
       data.
 
       <informalexample>
         <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
-  static long my_file_io_read(struct snd_info_entry *entry,
+  static ssize_t my_file_io_read(struct snd_info_entry *entry,
                               void *file_private_data,
                               struct file *file,
                               char *buf,
-                              unsigned long count,
-                              unsigned long pos)
+                              size_t count,
+                              loff_t pos)
   {
-          long size = count;
-          if (pos + size > local_max_size)
-                  size = local_max_size - pos;
-          if (copy_to_user(buf, local_data + pos, size))
+          if (copy_to_user(buf, local_data + pos, count))
                   return -EFAULT;
-          return size;
+          return count;
   }
 ]]>
         </programlisting>
       </informalexample>
+
+      If the size of the info entry has been set up properly,
+      <structfield>count</structfield> and <structfield>pos</structfield> are
+      guaranteed to fit within 0 and the given size.
+      You don't have to check the range in the callbacks unless any
+      other condition is required.
+
     </para>
 
   </chapter>

Documentation/DocBook/writing_usb_driver.tmpl

@@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ static inline void skel_delete (struct usb_skel *dev)
 {
     kfree (dev->bulk_in_buffer);
     if (dev->bulk_out_buffer != NULL)
-        usb_buffer_free (dev->udev, dev->bulk_out_size,
+        usb_free_coherent (dev->udev, dev->bulk_out_size,
             dev->bulk_out_buffer,
             dev->write_urb->transfer_dma);
     usb_free_urb (dev->write_urb);

Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.txt

@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ The driver should return one of the following result codes:
 
 		- PCI_ERS_RESULT_NEED_RESET
 		  Driver returns this if it thinks the device is not
-		  recoverable in it's current state and it needs a slot
+		  recoverable in its current state and it needs a slot
 		  reset to proceed.
 
 		- PCI_ERS_RESULT_DISCONNECT
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ in working condition.
 
 The driver is not supposed to restart normal driver I/O operations
 at this point.  It should limit itself to "probing" the device to
-check it's recoverability status. If all is right, then the platform
+check its recoverability status. If all is right, then the platform
 will call resume() once all drivers have ack'd link_reset().
 
 	Result codes:

Documentation/PCI/pcieaer-howto.txt

@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Reporting (AER) driver and provides information on how to use it, as
 well as how to enable the drivers of endpoint devices to conform with
 PCI Express AER driver.
 
-1.2 Copyright © Intel Corporation 2006.
+1.2 Copyright (C) Intel Corporation 2006.
 
 1.3 What is the PCI Express AER Driver?
 
@@ -71,15 +71,11 @@ console. If it's a correctable error, it is outputed as a warning.
 Otherwise, it is printed as an error. So users could choose different
 log level to filter out correctable error messages.
 
-Below shows an example.
-+------ PCI-Express Device Error -----+
-Error Severity          : Uncorrected (Fatal)
-PCIE Bus Error type     : Transaction Layer
-Unsupported Request     : First
-Requester ID            : 0500
-VendorID=8086h, DeviceID=0329h, Bus=05h, Device=00h, Function=00h
-TLB Header:
-04000001 00200a03 05010000 00050100
+Below shows an example:
+0000:50:00.0: PCIe Bus Error: severity=Uncorrected (Fatal), type=Transaction Layer, id=0500(Requester ID)
+0000:50:00.0:   device [8086:0329] error status/mask=00100000/00000000
+0000:50:00.0:    [20] Unsupported Request    (First)
+0000:50:00.0:   TLP Header: 04000001 00200a03 05010000 00050100
 
 In the example, 'Requester ID' means the ID of the device who sends
 the error message to root port. Pls. refer to pci express specs for
@@ -112,7 +108,7 @@ but the PCI Express link itself is fully functional. Fatal errors, on
 the other hand, cause the link to be unreliable.
 
 When AER is enabled, a PCI Express device will automatically send an
-error message to the PCIE root port above it when the device captures
+error message to the PCIe root port above it when the device captures
 an error. The Root Port, upon receiving an error reporting message,
 internally processes and logs the error message in its PCI Express
 capability structure. Error information being logged includes storing
@@ -198,8 +194,9 @@ to reset link, AER port service driver is required to provide the
 function to reset link. Firstly, kernel looks for if the upstream
 component has an aer driver. If it has, kernel uses the reset_link
 callback of the aer driver. If the upstream component has no aer driver
-and the port is downstream port, we will use the aer driver of the
-root port who reports the AER error. As for upstream ports,
+and the port is downstream port, we will perform a hot reset as the
+default by setting the Secondary Bus Reset bit of the Bridge Control
+register associated with the downstream port. As for upstream ports,
 they should provide their own aer service drivers with reset_link
 function. If error_detected returns PCI_ERS_RESULT_CAN_RECOVER and
 reset_link returns PCI_ERS_RESULT_RECOVERED, the error handling goes
@@ -253,11 +250,11 @@ cleanup uncorrectable status register. Pls. refer to section 3.3.
 
 4. Software error injection
 
-Debugging PCIE AER error recovery code is quite difficult because it
+Debugging PCIe AER error recovery code is quite difficult because it
 is hard to trigger real hardware errors. Software based error
-injection can be used to fake various kinds of PCIE errors.
+injection can be used to fake various kinds of PCIe errors.
 
-First you should enable PCIE AER software error injection in kernel
+First you should enable PCIe AER software error injection in kernel
 configuration, that is, following item should be in your .config.
 
 CONFIG_PCIEAER_INJECT=y or CONFIG_PCIEAER_INJECT=m

Documentation/Smack.txt

@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ NOTE: Smack labels are limited to 23 characters. The attr command
 If you don't do anything special all users will get the floor ("_")
 label when they log in. If you do want to log in via the hacked ssh
 at other labels use the attr command to set the smack value on the
-home directory and it's contents.
+home directory and its contents.
 
 You can add access rules in /etc/smack/accesses. They take the form:
 

Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy

@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Notes:
 
 - The flash on board is divided into 3 partitions.
   You should be careful to use flash on board.
-  It's partition is different from GraphicsClient Plus and GraphicsMaster
+  Its partition is different from GraphicsClient Plus and GraphicsMaster
 
 - 16bpp mode requires a different cable than what ships with the board.
   Contact ADS or look through the manual to wire your own. Currently,

Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen

@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ The driver only implements a four-wire touch panel protocol.
 
 The touchscreen driver is maintenance free except for the pen-down or
 touch threshold.  Some resistive displays and board combinations may
-require tuning of this threshold.  The driver exposes some of it's
+require tuning of this threshold.  The driver exposes some of its
 internal state in the sys filesystem.  If the kernel is configured
 with it, CONFIG_SYSFS, and sysfs is mounted at /sys, there will be a
 directory

Documentation/atomic_ops.txt

@@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ counter decrement would not become globally visible until the
 obj->active update does.
 
 As a historical note, 32-bit Sparc used to only allow usage of
-24-bits of it's atomic_t type.  This was because it used 8 bits
+24-bits of its atomic_t type.  This was because it used 8 bits
 as a spinlock for SMP safety.  Sparc32 lacked a "compare and swap"
 type instruction.  However, 32-bit Sparc has since been moved over
 to a "hash table of spinlocks" scheme, that allows the full 32-bit

Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt

@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
 	void bfin_gpio_irq_free(unsigned gpio);
 
     The request functions will record the function state for a certain pin,
-    the free functions will clear it's function state.
+    the free functions will clear its function state.
     Once a pin is requested, it can't be requested again before it is freed by
     previous caller, otherwise kernel will dump stacks, and the request
     function fail.

Documentation/cachetlb.txt

@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 
 This document describes the cache/tlb flushing interfaces called
 by the Linux VM subsystem.  It enumerates over each interface,
-describes it's intended purpose, and what side effect is expected
+describes its intended purpose, and what side effect is expected
 after the interface is invoked.
 
 The side effects described below are stated for a uniprocessor
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ require a whole different set of interfaces to handle properly.
 The biggest problem is that of virtual aliasing in the data cache
 of a processor.
 
-Is your port susceptible to virtual aliasing in it's D-cache?
+Is your port susceptible to virtual aliasing in its D-cache?
 Well, if your D-cache is virtually indexed, is larger in size than
 PAGE_SIZE, and does not prevent multiple cache lines for the same
 physical address from existing at once, you have this problem.
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ one way to solve this (in particular SPARC_FLAG_MMAPSHARED).
 Next, you have to solve the D-cache aliasing issue for all
 other cases.  Please keep in mind that fact that, for a given page
 mapped into some user address space, there is always at least one more
-mapping, that of the kernel in it's linear mapping starting at
+mapping, that of the kernel in its linear mapping starting at
 PAGE_OFFSET.  So immediately, once the first user maps a given
 physical page into its address space, by implication the D-cache
 aliasing problem has the potential to exist since the kernel already

Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt

@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ HOWTO
 You can do a very simple testing of running two dd threads in two different
 cgroups. Here is what you can do.
 
+- Enable Block IO controller
+	CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP=y
+
 - Enable group scheduling in CFQ
 	CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED=y
 
@@ -54,32 +57,52 @@ cgroups. Here is what you can do.
 
 Various user visible config options
 ===================================
-CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED
-	- Enables group scheduling in CFQ. Currently only 1 level of group
-	  creation is allowed.
-
-CONFIG_DEBUG_CFQ_IOSCHED
-	- Enables some debugging messages in blktrace. Also creates extra
-	  cgroup file blkio.dequeue.
-
-Config options selected automatically
-=====================================
-These config options are not user visible and are selected/deselected
-automatically based on IO scheduler configuration.
-
 CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP
-	- Block IO controller. Selected by CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED.
+	- Block IO controller.
 
 CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP
-	- Debug help. Selected by CONFIG_DEBUG_CFQ_IOSCHED.
+	- Debug help. Right now some additional stats file show up in cgroup
+	  if this option is enabled.
+
+CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED
+	- Enables group scheduling in CFQ. Currently only 1 level of group
+	  creation is allowed.
 
 Details of cgroup files
 =======================
 - blkio.weight
-	- Specifies per cgroup weight.
-
+	- Specifies per cgroup weight. This is default weight of the group
+	  on all the devices until and unless overridden by per device rule.
+	  (See blkio.weight_device).
 	  Currently allowed range of weights is from 100 to 1000.
 
+- blkio.weight_device
+	- One can specify per cgroup per device rules using this interface.
+	  These rules override the default value of group weight as specified
+	  by blkio.weight.
+
+	  Following is the format.
+
+	  #echo dev_maj:dev_minor weight > /path/to/cgroup/blkio.weight_device
+	  Configure weight=300 on /dev/sdb (8:16) in this cgroup
+	  # echo 8:16 300 > blkio.weight_device
+	  # cat blkio.weight_device
+	  dev     weight
+	  8:16    300
+
+	  Configure weight=500 on /dev/sda (8:0) in this cgroup
+	  # echo 8:0 500 > blkio.weight_device
+	  # cat blkio.weight_device
+	  dev     weight
+	  8:0     500
+	  8:16    300
+
+	  Remove specific weight for /dev/sda in this cgroup
+	  # echo 8:0 0 > blkio.weight_device
+	  # cat blkio.weight_device
+	  dev     weight
+	  8:16    300
+
 - blkio.time
 	- disk time allocated to cgroup per device in milliseconds. First
 	  two fields specify the major and minor number of the device and
@@ -92,13 +115,105 @@ Details of cgroup files
 	  third field specifies the number of sectors transferred by the
 	  group to/from the device.
 
+- blkio.io_service_bytes
+	- Number of bytes transferred to/from the disk by the group. These
+	  are further divided by the type of operation - read or write, sync
+	  or async. First two fields specify the major and minor number of the
+	  device, third field specifies the operation type and the fourth field
+	  specifies the number of bytes.
+
+- blkio.io_serviced
+	- Number of IOs completed to/from the disk by the group. These
+	  are further divided by the type of operation - read or write, sync
+	  or async. First two fields specify the major and minor number of the
+	  device, third field specifies the operation type and the fourth field
+	  specifies the number of IOs.
+
+- blkio.io_service_time
+	- Total amount of time between request dispatch and request completion
+	  for the IOs done by this cgroup. This is in nanoseconds to make it
+	  meaningful for flash devices too. For devices with queue depth of 1,
+	  this time represents the actual service time. When queue_depth > 1,
+	  that is no longer true as requests may be served out of order. This
+	  may cause the service time for a given IO to include the service time
+	  of multiple IOs when served out of order which may result in total
+	  io_service_time > actual time elapsed. This time is further divided by
+	  the type of operation - read or write, sync or async. First two fields
+	  specify the major and minor number of the device, third field
+	  specifies the operation type and the fourth field specifies the
+	  io_service_time in ns.
+
+- blkio.io_wait_time
+	- Total amount of time the IOs for this cgroup spent waiting in the
+	  scheduler queues for service. This can be greater than the total time
+	  elapsed since it is cumulative io_wait_time for all IOs. It is not a
+	  measure of total time the cgroup spent waiting but rather a measure of
+	  the wait_time for its individual IOs. For devices with queue_depth > 1
+	  this metric does not include the time spent waiting for service once
+	  the IO is dispatched to the device but till it actually gets serviced
+	  (there might be a time lag here due to re-ordering of requests by the
+	  device). This is in nanoseconds to make it meaningful for flash
+	  devices too. This time is further divided by the type of operation -
+	  read or write, sync or async. First two fields specify the major and
+	  minor number of the device, third field specifies the operation type
+	  and the fourth field specifies the io_wait_time in ns.
+
+- blkio.io_merged
+	- Total number of bios/requests merged into requests belonging to this
+	  cgroup. This is further divided by the type of operation - read or
+	  write, sync or async.
+
+- blkio.io_queued
+	- Total number of requests queued up at any given instant for this
+	  cgroup. This is further divided by the type of operation - read or
+	  write, sync or async.
+
+- blkio.avg_queue_size
+	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP=y.
+	  The average queue size for this cgroup over the entire time of this
+	  cgroup's existence. Queue size samples are taken each time one of the
+	  queues of this cgroup gets a timeslice.
+
+- blkio.group_wait_time
+	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP=y.
+	  This is the amount of time the cgroup had to wait since it became busy
+	  (i.e., went from 0 to 1 request queued) to get a timeslice for one of
+	  its queues. This is different from the io_wait_time which is the
+	  cumulative total of the amount of time spent by each IO in that cgroup
+	  waiting in the scheduler queue. This is in nanoseconds. If this is
+	  read when the cgroup is in a waiting (for timeslice) state, the stat
+	  will only report the group_wait_time accumulated till the last time it
+	  got a timeslice and will not include the current delta.
+
+- blkio.empty_time
+	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP=y.
+	  This is the amount of time a cgroup spends without any pending
+	  requests when not being served, i.e., it does not include any time
+	  spent idling for one of the queues of the cgroup. This is in
+	  nanoseconds. If this is read when the cgroup is in an empty state,
+	  the stat will only report the empty_time accumulated till the last
+	  time it had a pending request and will not include the current delta.
+
+- blkio.idle_time
+	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP=y.
+	  This is the amount of time spent by the IO scheduler idling for a
+	  given cgroup in anticipation of a better request than the exising ones
+	  from other queues/cgroups. This is in nanoseconds. If this is read
+	  when the cgroup is in an idling state, the stat will only report the
+	  idle_time accumulated till the last idle period and will not include
+	  the current delta.
+
 - blkio.dequeue
-	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_CFQ_IOSCHED=y. This
+	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP=y. This
 	  gives the statistics about how many a times a group was dequeued
 	  from service tree of the device. First two fields specify the major
 	  and minor number of the device and third field specifies the number
 	  of times a group was dequeued from a particular device.
 
+- blkio.reset_stats
+	- Writing an int to this file will result in resetting all the stats
+	  for that cgroup.
+
 CFQ sysfs tunable
 =================
 /sys/block/<disk>/queue/iosched/group_isolation

Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt

@@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ void cancel_attach(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp,
 
 Called when a task attach operation has failed after can_attach() has succeeded.
 A subsystem whose can_attach() has some side-effects should provide this
-function, so that the subsytem can implement a rollback. If not, not necessary.
+function, so that the subsystem can implement a rollback. If not, not necessary.
 This will be called only about subsystems whose can_attach() operation have
 succeeded.
 

Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt

@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Nodes to a set of tasks.   In this document "Memory Node" refers to
 an on-line node that contains memory.
 
 Cpusets constrain the CPU and Memory placement of tasks to only
-the resources within a tasks current cpuset.  They form a nested
+the resources within a task's current cpuset.  They form a nested
 hierarchy visible in a virtual file system.  These are the essential
 hooks, beyond what is already present, required to manage dynamic
 job placement on large systems.
@@ -53,11 +53,11 @@ Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt.
 Requests by a task, using the sched_setaffinity(2) system call to
 include CPUs in its CPU affinity mask, and using the mbind(2) and
 set_mempolicy(2) system calls to include Memory Nodes in its memory
-policy, are both filtered through that tasks cpuset, filtering out any
+policy, are both filtered through that task's cpuset, filtering out any
 CPUs or Memory Nodes not in that cpuset.  The scheduler will not
 schedule a task on a CPU that is not allowed in its cpus_allowed
 vector, and the kernel page allocator will not allocate a page on a
-node that is not allowed in the requesting tasks mems_allowed vector.
+node that is not allowed in the requesting task's mems_allowed vector.
 
 User level code may create and destroy cpusets by name in the cgroup
 virtual file system, manage the attributes and permissions of these
@@ -121,9 +121,9 @@ Cpusets extends these two mechanisms as follows:
  - Each task in the system is attached to a cpuset, via a pointer
    in the task structure to a reference counted cgroup structure.
  - Calls to sched_setaffinity are filtered to just those CPUs
-   allowed in that tasks cpuset.
+   allowed in that task's cpuset.
  - Calls to mbind and set_mempolicy are filtered to just
-   those Memory Nodes allowed in that tasks cpuset.
+   those Memory Nodes allowed in that task's cpuset.
  - The root cpuset contains all the systems CPUs and Memory
    Nodes.
  - For any cpuset, one can define child cpusets containing a subset
@@ -141,11 +141,11 @@ into the rest of the kernel, none in performance critical paths:
  - in init/main.c, to initialize the root cpuset at system boot.
  - in fork and exit, to attach and detach a task from its cpuset.
  - in sched_setaffinity, to mask the requested CPUs by what's
-   allowed in that tasks cpuset.
+   allowed in that task's cpuset.
  - in sched.c migrate_live_tasks(), to keep migrating tasks within
    the CPUs allowed by their cpuset, if possible.
  - in the mbind and set_mempolicy system calls, to mask the requested
-   Memory Nodes by what's allowed in that tasks cpuset.
+   Memory Nodes by what's allowed in that task's cpuset.
  - in page_alloc.c, to restrict memory to allowed nodes.
  - in vmscan.c, to restrict page recovery to the current cpuset.
 
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ new system calls are added for cpusets - all support for querying and
 modifying cpusets is via this cpuset file system.
 
 The /proc/<pid>/status file for each task has four added lines,
-displaying the tasks cpus_allowed (on which CPUs it may be scheduled)
+displaying the task's cpus_allowed (on which CPUs it may be scheduled)
 and mems_allowed (on which Memory Nodes it may obtain memory),
 in the two formats seen in the following example:
 
@@ -323,17 +323,17 @@ stack segment pages of a task.
 
 By default, both kinds of memory spreading are off, and memory
 pages are allocated on the node local to where the task is running,
-except perhaps as modified by the tasks NUMA mempolicy or cpuset
+except perhaps as modified by the task's NUMA mempolicy or cpuset
 configuration, so long as sufficient free memory pages are available.
 
 When new cpusets are created, they inherit the memory spread settings
 of their parent.
 
 Setting memory spreading causes allocations for the affected page
-or slab caches to ignore the tasks NUMA mempolicy and be spread
+or slab caches to ignore the task's NUMA mempolicy and be spread
 instead.    Tasks using mbind() or set_mempolicy() calls to set NUMA
 mempolicies will not notice any change in these calls as a result of
-their containing tasks memory spread settings.  If memory spreading
+their containing task's memory spread settings.  If memory spreading
 is turned off, then the currently specified NUMA mempolicy once again
 applies to memory page allocations.
 
@@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ pages from the node returned by cpuset_mem_spread_node().
 
 The cpuset_mem_spread_node() routine is also simple.  It uses the
 value of a per-task rotor cpuset_mem_spread_rotor to select the next
-node in the current tasks mems_allowed to prefer for the allocation.
+node in the current task's mems_allowed to prefer for the allocation.
 
 This memory placement policy is also known (in other contexts) as
 round-robin or interleave.
@@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ is attached, is subtle.
 If a cpuset has its Memory Nodes modified, then for each task attached
 to that cpuset, the next time that the kernel attempts to allocate
 a page of memory for that task, the kernel will notice the change
-in the tasks cpuset, and update its per-task memory placement to
+in the task's cpuset, and update its per-task memory placement to
 remain within the new cpusets memory placement.  If the task was using
 mempolicy MPOL_BIND, and the nodes to which it was bound overlap with
 its new cpuset, then the task will continue to use whatever subset
@@ -603,13 +603,13 @@ was using MPOL_BIND and now none of its MPOL_BIND nodes are allowed
 in the new cpuset, then the task will be essentially treated as if it
 was MPOL_BIND bound to the new cpuset (even though its NUMA placement,
 as queried by get_mempolicy(), doesn't change).  If a task is moved
-from one cpuset to another, then the kernel will adjust the tasks
+from one cpuset to another, then the kernel will adjust the task's
 memory placement, as above, the next time that the kernel attempts
 to allocate a page of memory for that task.
 
 If a cpuset has its 'cpuset.cpus' modified, then each task in that cpuset
 will have its allowed CPU placement changed immediately.  Similarly,
-if a tasks pid is written to another cpusets 'cpuset.tasks' file, then its
+if a task's pid is written to another cpusets 'cpuset.tasks' file, then its
 allowed CPU placement is changed immediately.  If such a task had been
 bound to some subset of its cpuset using the sched_setaffinity() call,
 the task will be allowed to run on any CPU allowed in its new cpuset,
@@ -626,16 +626,16 @@ cpusets memory placement policy 'cpuset.mems' subsequently changes.
 If the cpuset flag file 'cpuset.memory_migrate' is set true, then when
 tasks are attached to that cpuset, any pages that task had
 allocated to it on nodes in its previous cpuset are migrated
-to the tasks new cpuset. The relative placement of the page within
+to the task's new cpuset. The relative placement of the page within
 the cpuset is preserved during these migration operations if possible.
 For example if the page was on the second valid node of the prior cpuset
 then the page will be placed on the second valid node of the new cpuset.
 
-Also if 'cpuset.memory_migrate' is set true, then if that cpusets
+Also if 'cpuset.memory_migrate' is set true, then if that cpuset's
 'cpuset.mems' file is modified, pages allocated to tasks in that
 cpuset, that were on nodes in the previous setting of 'cpuset.mems',
 will be moved to nodes in the new setting of 'mems.'
-Pages that were not in the tasks prior cpuset, or in the cpusets
+Pages that were not in the task's prior cpuset, or in the cpuset's
 prior 'cpuset.mems' setting, will not be moved.
 
 There is an exception to the above.  If hotplug functionality is used
@@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ There is a second exception to the above.  GFP_ATOMIC requests are
 kernel internal allocations that must be satisfied, immediately.
 The kernel may drop some request, in rare cases even panic, if a
 GFP_ATOMIC alloc fails.  If the request cannot be satisfied within
-the current tasks cpuset, then we relax the cpuset, and look for
+the current task's cpuset, then we relax the cpuset, and look for
 memory anywhere we can find it.  It's better to violate the cpuset
 than stress the kernel.
 

Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt

@@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
 	  we have to check if OLDPAGE/NEWPAGE is a valid page after commit().
 
 8. LRU
-        Each memcg has its own private LRU. Now, it's handling is under global
+        Each memcg has its own private LRU. Now, its handling is under global
 	VM's control (means that it's handled under global zone->lru_lock).
 	Almost all routines around memcg's LRU is called by global LRU's
 	list management functions under zone->lru_lock().

Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt

@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ some of the pages cached in the cgroup (page cache pages).
 
 4.2 Task migration
 
-When a task migrates from one cgroup to another, it's charge is not
+When a task migrates from one cgroup to another, its charge is not
 carried forward by default. The pages allocated from the original cgroup still
 remain charged to it, the charge is dropped when the page is freed or
 reclaimed.

Documentation/connector/connector.txt

@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ int cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 __groups, int gfp_mask);
  int gfp_mask			- GFP mask.
 
  Note: When registering new callback user, connector core assigns
- netlink group to the user which is equal to it's id.idx.
+ netlink group to the user which is equal to its id.idx.
 
 /*****************************************/
 Protocol description.

Documentation/credentials.txt

@@ -408,9 +408,6 @@ This should be used inside the RCU read lock, as in the following example:
 		...
 	}
 
-A function need not get RCU read lock to use __task_cred() if it is holding a
-spinlock at the time as this implicitly holds the RCU read lock.
-
 Should it be necessary to hold another task's credentials for a long period of
 time, and possibly to sleep whilst doing so, then the caller should get a
 reference on them using:
@@ -426,17 +423,16 @@ credentials, hiding the RCU magic from the caller:
 	uid_t task_uid(task)		Task's real UID
 	uid_t task_euid(task)		Task's effective UID
 
-If the caller is holding a spinlock or the RCU read lock at the time anyway,
-then:
+If the caller is holding the RCU read lock at the time anyway, then:
 
 	__task_cred(task)->uid
 	__task_cred(task)->euid
 
 should be used instead.  Similarly, if multiple aspects of a task's credentials
-need to be accessed, RCU read lock or a spinlock should be used, __task_cred()
-called, the result stored in a temporary pointer and then the credential
-aspects called from that before dropping the lock.  This prevents the
-potentially expensive RCU magic from being invoked multiple times.
+need to be accessed, RCU read lock should be used, __task_cred() called, the
+result stored in a temporary pointer and then the credential aspects called
+from that before dropping the lock.  This prevents the potentially expensive
+RCU magic from being invoked multiple times.
 
 Should some other single aspect of another task's credentials need to be
 accessed, then this can be used:

Documentation/dvb/ci.txt

@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ This application requires the following to function properly as of now.
 
 * Cards that fall in this category
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-At present the cards that fall in this category are the Twinhan and it's
+At present the cards that fall in this category are the Twinhan and its
 clones, these cards are available as VVMER, Tomato, Hercules, Orange and
 so on.
 

Documentation/dvb/contributors.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 Thanks go to the following people for patches and contributions:
 
 Michael Hunold <m.hunold@gmx.de>
-  for the initial saa7146 driver and it's recent overhaul
+  for the initial saa7146 driver and its recent overhaul
 
 Christian Theiss
   for his work on the initial Linux DVB driver

Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt

@@ -241,16 +241,6 @@ Who:	Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-What (Why):
-	- xt_recent: the old ipt_recent proc dir
-	  (superseded by /proc/net/xt_recent)
-
-When:	January 2009 or Linux 2.7.0, whichever comes first
-Why:	Superseded by newer revisions or modules
-Who:	Jan Engelhardt <jengelh@computergmbh.de>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:	GPIO autorequest on gpio_direction_{input,output}() in gpiolib
 When:	February 2010
 Why:	All callers should use explicit gpio_request()/gpio_free().
@@ -520,6 +510,24 @@ Who:	Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
 
 ----------------------------
 
+What:	sysfs-class-rfkill state file
+When:	Feb 2014
+Files:	net/rfkill/core.c
+Why: 	Documented as obsolete since Feb 2010. This file is limited to 3
+	states while the rfkill drivers can have 4 states.
+Who: 	anybody or Florian Mickler <florian@mickler.org>
+
+----------------------------
+
+What: 	sysfs-class-rfkill claim file
+When:	Feb 2012
+Files:	net/rfkill/core.c
+Why:	It is not possible to claim an rfkill driver since 2007. This is
+	Documented as obsolete since Feb 2010.
+Who: 	anybody or Florian Mickler <florian@mickler.org>
+
+----------------------------
+
 What:	capifs
 When:	February 2011
 Files:	drivers/isdn/capi/capifs.*
@@ -579,6 +587,35 @@ Who:	Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
 
 ----------------------------
 
+What:	iwlwifi 50XX module parameters
+When:	2.6.40
+Why:	The "..50" modules parameters were used to configure 5000 series and
+	up devices; different set of module parameters also available for 4965
+	with same functionalities. Consolidate both set into single place
+	in drivers/net/wireless/iwlwifi/iwl-agn.c
+
+Who:	Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com>
+
+----------------------------
+
+What:	iwl4965 alias support
+When:	2.6.40
+Why:	Internal alias support has been present in module-init-tools for some
+	time, the MODULE_ALIAS("iwl4965") boilerplate aliases can be removed
+	with no impact.
+
+Who:	Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	xt_NOTRACK
+Files:	net/netfilter/xt_NOTRACK.c
+When:	April 2011
+Why:	Superseded by xt_CT
+Who:	Netfilter developer team <netfilter-devel@vger.kernel.org>
+
+---------------------------
+
 What:	video4linux /dev/vtx teletext API support
 When:	2.6.35
 Files:	drivers/media/video/saa5246a.c drivers/media/video/saa5249.c

Documentation/filesystems/Locking

@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ prototypes:
 locking rules:
 	All except set_page_dirty may block
 
-			BKL	PageLocked(page)	i_sem
+			BKL	PageLocked(page)	i_mutex
 writepage:		no	yes, unlocks (see below)
 readpage:		no	yes, unlocks
 sync_page:		no	maybe
@@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ check_flags:		no
 implementations.  If your fs is not using generic_file_llseek, you
 need to acquire and release the appropriate locks in your ->llseek().
 For many filesystems, it is probably safe to acquire the inode
-semaphore.  Note some filesystems (i.e. remote ones) provide no
+mutex.  Note some filesystems (i.e. remote ones) provide no
 protection for i_size so you will need to use the BKL.
 
 Note: ext2_release() was *the* source of contention on fs-intensive

Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt

@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ found to be inadequate, in this case. The Generic Netlink system was
 used for this as raw Netlink would lead to a significant increase in
 complexity. There's no question that the Generic Netlink system is an
 elegant solution for common case ioctl functions but it's not a complete
-replacement probably because it's primary purpose in life is to be a
+replacement probably because its primary purpose in life is to be a
 message bus implementation rather than specifically an ioctl replacement.
 While it would be possible to work around this there is one concern
 that lead to the decision to not use it. This is that the autofs

Documentation/filesystems/ceph.txt

@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Mount Options
 	Specify the IP and/or port the client should bind to locally.
 	There is normally not much reason to do this.  If the IP is not
 	specified, the client's IP address is determined by looking at the
-	address it's connection to the monitor originates from.
+	address its connection to the monitor originates from.
 
   wsize=X
 	Specify the maximum write size in bytes.  By default there is no

Documentation/filesystems/dlmfs.txt

@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ You'll want to start heartbeating on a volume which all the nodes in
 your lockspace can access. The easiest way to do this is via
 ocfs2_hb_ctl (distributed with ocfs2-tools). Right now it requires
 that an OCFS2 file system be in place so that it can automatically
-find it's heartbeat area, though it will eventually support heartbeat
+find its heartbeat area, though it will eventually support heartbeat
 against raw disks.
 
 Please see the ocfs2_hb_ctl and mkfs.ocfs2 manual pages distributed

Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt

@@ -59,8 +59,19 @@ commit=nrsec	(*)	Ext3 can be told to sync all its data and metadata
 			Setting it to very large values will improve
 			performance.
 
-barrier=1		This enables/disables barriers.  barrier=0 disables
-			it, barrier=1 enables it.
+barrier=<0(*)|1>	This enables/disables the use of write barriers in
+barrier			the jbd code.  barrier=0 disables, barrier=1 enables.
+nobarrier	(*)	This also requires an IO stack which can support
+			barriers, and if jbd gets an error on a barrier
+			write, it will disable again with a warning.
+			Write barriers enforce proper on-disk ordering
+			of journal commits, making volatile disk write caches
+			safe to use, at some performance penalty.  If
+			your disks are battery-backed in one way or another,
+			disabling barriers may safely improve performance.
+			The mount options "barrier" and "nobarrier" can
+			also be used to enable or disable barriers, for
+			consistency with other ext3 mount options.
 
 orlov		(*)	This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is
 			enabled by default.

Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt

@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ flags, it will return EBADR and the contents of fm_flags will contain
 the set of flags which caused the error. If the kernel is compatible
 with all flags passed, the contents of fm_flags will be unmodified.
 It is up to userspace to determine whether rejection of a particular
-flag is fatal to it's operation. This scheme is intended to allow the
+flag is fatal to its operation. This scheme is intended to allow the
 fiemap interface to grow in the future but without losing
 compatibility with old software.
 
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ If this flag is set, the kernel will sync the file before mapping extents.
 
 * FIEMAP_FLAG_XATTR
 If this flag is set, the extents returned will describe the inodes
-extended attribute lookup tree, instead of it's data tree.
+extended attribute lookup tree, instead of its data tree.
 
 
 Extent Mapping
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ struct fiemap_extent {
 };
 
 All offsets and lengths are in bytes and mirror those on disk.  It is valid
-for an extents logical offset to start before the request or it's logical
+for an extents logical offset to start before the request or its logical
 length to extend past the request.  Unless FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED is
 returned, fe_logical, fe_physical, and fe_length will be aligned to the
 block size of the file system.  With the exception of extents flagged as
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ been allocated for the file yet.
 
 * FIEMAP_EXTENT_DELALLOC
   - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN.
-Delayed allocation - while there is data for this extent, it's
+Delayed allocation - while there is data for this extent, its
 physical location has not been allocated yet.
 
 * FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Data is located within a meta data block.
 Data is packed into a block with data from other files.
 
 * FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNWRITTEN
-Unwritten extent - the extent is allocated but it's data has not been
+Unwritten extent - the extent is allocated but its data has not been
 initialized.  This indicates the extent's data will be all zero if read
 through the filesystem but the contents are undefined if read directly from
 the device.
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ VFS -> File System Implementation
 
 File systems wishing to support fiemap must implement a ->fiemap callback on
 their inode_operations structure. The fs ->fiemap call is responsible for
-defining it's set of supported fiemap flags, and calling a helper function on
+defining its set of supported fiemap flags, and calling a helper function on
 each discovered extent:
 
 struct inode_operations {

Documentation/filesystems/fuse.txt

@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Mount options
 'default_permissions'
 
   By default FUSE doesn't check file access permissions, the
-  filesystem is free to implement it's access policy or leave it to
+  filesystem is free to implement its access policy or leave it to
   the underlying file access mechanism (e.g. in case of network
   filesystems).  This option enables permission checking, restricting
   access based on file mode.  It is usually useful together with the
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ or may honor them by sending a reply to the _original_ request, with
 the error set to EINTR.
 
 It is also possible that there's a race between processing the
-original request and it's INTERRUPT request.  There are two possibilities:
+original request and its INTERRUPT request.  There are two possibilities:
 
   1) The INTERRUPT request is processed before the original request is
      processed

Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 Global File System
 ------------------
 
-http://sources.redhat.com/cluster/
+http://sources.redhat.com/cluster/wiki/
 
 GFS is a cluster file system. It allows a cluster of computers to
 simultaneously use a block device that is shared between them (with FC,
@@ -36,11 +36,11 @@ GFS2 is not on-disk compatible with previous versions of GFS, but it
 is pretty close.
 
 The following man pages can be found at the URL above:
-  fsck.gfs2	to repair a filesystem
-  gfs2_grow	to expand a filesystem online
-  gfs2_jadd	to add journals to a filesystem online
-  gfs2_tool	to manipulate, examine and tune a filesystem
+  fsck.gfs2		to repair a filesystem
+  gfs2_grow		to expand a filesystem online
+  gfs2_jadd		to add journals to a filesystem online
+  gfs2_tool		to manipulate, examine and tune a filesystem
   gfs2_quota	to examine and change quota values in a filesystem
   gfs2_convert	to convert a gfs filesystem to gfs2 in-place
   mount.gfs2	to help mount(8) mount a filesystem
-  mkfs.gfs2	to make a filesystem
+  mkfs.gfs2		to make a filesystem

Documentation/filesystems/hpfs.txt

@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ to analyze or change OS2SYS.INI.
 Codepages
 
 HPFS can contain several uppercasing tables for several codepages and each
-file has a pointer to codepage it's name is in. However OS/2 was created in
+file has a pointer to codepage its name is in. However OS/2 was created in
 America where people don't care much about codepages and so multiple codepages
 support is quite buggy. I have Czech OS/2 working in codepage 852 on my disk.
 Once I booted English OS/2 working in cp 850 and I created a file on my 852

Documentation/filesystems/logfs.txt

@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Levels
 ------
 
 Garbage collection (GC) may fail if all data is written
-indiscriminately.  One requirement of GC is that data is seperated
+indiscriminately.  One requirement of GC is that data is separated
 roughly according to the distance between the tree root and the data.
 Effectively that means all file data is on level 0, indirect blocks
 are on levels 1, 2, 3 4 or 5 for 1x, 2x, 3x, 4x or 5x indirect blocks,
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ respectively.  Inode file data is on level 6 for the inodes and 7-11
 for indirect blocks.
 
 Each segment contains objects of a single level only.  As a result,
-each level requires its own seperate segment to be open for writing.
+each level requires its own separate segment to be open for writing.
 
 Inode File
 ----------
@@ -106,9 +106,9 @@ Vim
 ---
 
 By cleverly predicting the life time of data, it is possible to
-seperate long-living data from short-living data and thereby reduce
+separate long-living data from short-living data and thereby reduce
 the GC overhead later.  Each type of distinc life expectency (vim) can
-have a seperate segment open for writing.  Each (level, vim) tupel can
+have a separate segment open for writing.  Each (level, vim) tupel can
 be open just once.  If an open segment with unknown vim is encountered
 at mount time, it is closed and ignored henceforth.
 

Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-cache.txt

@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ failed lookup meant a definite 'no'.
 request/response format
 -----------------------
 
-While each cache is free to use it's own format for requests
+While each cache is free to use its own format for requests
 and responses over channel, the following is recommended as
 appropriate and support routines are available to help:
 Each request or response record should be printable ASCII

Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.txt

@@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ NILFS2 supports the following mount options:
 (*) == default
 
 nobarrier		Disables barriers.
-errors=continue(*)	Keep going on a filesystem error.
-errors=remount-ro	Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
+errors=continue		Keep going on a filesystem error.
+errors=remount-ro(*)	Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
 errors=panic		Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
 cp=n			Specify the checkpoint-number of the snapshot to be
 			mounted.  Checkpoints and snapshots are listed by lscp

Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt

@@ -80,3 +80,10 @@ user_xattr	(*)	Enables Extended User Attributes.
 nouser_xattr		Disables Extended User Attributes.
 acl			Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
 noacl		(*)	Disables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
+resv_level=2	(*)	Set how agressive allocation reservations will be.
+			Valid values are between 0 (reservations off) to 8
+			(maximum space for reservations).
+dir_resv_level=	(*)	By default, directory reservations will scale with file
+			reservations - users should rarely need to change this
+			value. If allocation reservations are turned off, this
+			option will have no effect.

Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt

@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Table 1-4: Contents of the stat files (as of 2.6.30-rc7)
   cgtime        guest time of the task children in jiffies
 ..............................................................................
 
-The /proc/PID/map file containing the currently mapped memory regions and
+The /proc/PID/maps file containing the currently mapped memory regions and
 their access permissions.
 
 The format is:
@@ -968,7 +968,7 @@ your system and how much traffic was routed over those devices:
   ...] 1375103    17405    0    0    0     0       0          0 
   ...] 1703981     5535    0    0    0     3       0          0 
 
-In addition, each Channel Bond interface has it's own directory.  For
+In addition, each Channel Bond interface has its own directory.  For
 example, the bond0 device will have a directory called /proc/net/bond0/.
 It will contain information that is specific to that bond, such as the
 current slaves of the bond, the link status of the slaves, and how
@@ -1365,7 +1365,7 @@ been accounted as having caused 1MB of write.
 In other words: The number of bytes which this process caused to not happen,
 by truncating pagecache. A task can cause "negative" IO too. If this task
 truncates some dirty pagecache, some IO which another task has been accounted
-for (in it's write_bytes) will not be happening. We _could_ just subtract that
+for (in its write_bytes) will not be happening. We _could_ just subtract that
 from the truncating task's write_bytes, but there is information loss in doing
 that.
 

Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt

@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@ protocol used by Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95 and Windows NT.
 Smbfs was inspired by Samba, the program written by Andrew Tridgell
 that turns any Unix host into a file server for DOS or Windows clients.
 
-Smbfs is a SMB client, but uses parts of samba for it's operation. For
+Smbfs is a SMB client, but uses parts of samba for its operation. For
 more info on samba, including documentation, please go to
 http://www.samba.org/ and then on to your nearest mirror.

Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-tagging.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+Sysfs tagging
+-------------
+
+(Taken almost verbatim from Eric Biederman's netns tagging patch
+commit msg)
+
+The problem.  Network devices show up in sysfs and with the network
+namespace active multiple devices with the same name can show up in
+the same directory, ouch!
+
+To avoid that problem and allow existing applications in network
+namespaces to see the same interface that is currently presented in
+sysfs, sysfs now has tagging directory support.
+
+By using the network namespace pointers as tags to separate out the
+the sysfs directory entries we ensure that we don't have conflicts
+in the directories and applications only see a limited set of
+the network devices.
+
+Each sysfs directory entry may be tagged with zero or one
+namespaces.  A sysfs_dirent is augmented with a void *s_ns.  If a
+directory entry is tagged, then sysfs_dirent->s_flags will have a
+flag between KOBJ_NS_TYPE_NONE and KOBJ_NS_TYPES, and s_ns will
+point to the namespace to which it belongs.
+
+Each sysfs superblock's sysfs_super_info contains an array void
+*ns[KOBJ_NS_TYPES].  When a a task in a tagging namespace
+kobj_nstype first mounts sysfs, a new superblock is created.  It
+will be differentiated from other sysfs mounts by having its
+s_fs_info->ns[kobj_nstype] set to the new namespace.  Note that
+through bind mounting and mounts propagation, a task can easily view
+the contents of other namespaces' sysfs mounts.  Therefore, when a
+namespace exits, it will call kobj_ns_exit() to invalidate any
+sysfs_dirent->s_ns pointers pointing to it.
+
+Users of this interface:
+- define a type in the kobj_ns_type enumeration.
+- call kobj_ns_type_register() with its kobj_ns_type_operations which has
+  - current_ns() which returns current's namespace
+  - netlink_ns() which returns a socket's namespace
+  - initial_ns() which returns the initial namesapce
+- call kobj_ns_exit() when an individual tag is no longer valid

Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt

@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ structure (this is the kernel-side implementation of file
 descriptors). The freshly allocated file structure is initialized with
 a pointer to the dentry and a set of file operation member functions.
 These are taken from the inode data. The open() file method is then
-called so the specific filesystem implementation can do it's work. You
+called so the specific filesystem implementation can do its work. You
 can see that this is another switch performed by the VFS. The file
 structure is placed into the file descriptor table for the process.
 

Documentation/hwmon/lm85

@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ temperature configuration points:
 
 There are three PWM outputs. The LM85 datasheet suggests that the
 pwm3 output control both fan3 and fan4. Each PWM can be individually
-configured and assigned to a zone for it's control value. Each PWM can be
+configured and assigned to a zone for its control value. Each PWM can be
 configured individually according to the following options.
 
 * pwm#_auto_pwm_min - this specifies the PWM value for temp#_auto_temp_off

Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801

@@ -27,7 +27,13 @@ Authors:
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 
-None.
+* disable_features (bit vector)
+Disable selected features normally supported by the device. This makes it
+possible to work around possible driver or hardware bugs if the feature in
+question doesn't work as intended for whatever reason. Bit values:
+  1  disable SMBus PEC
+  2  disable the block buffer
+  8  disable the I2C block read functionality
 
 
 Description

Documentation/input/joystick.txt

@@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ for the port of the SoundFusion is supported by the cs461x.c module.
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
   The Live! has a special PCI gameport, which, although it doesn't provide
 any "Enhanced" stuff like 4DWave and friends, is quite a bit faster than
-it's ISA counterparts. It also requires special support, hence the
+its ISA counterparts. It also requires special support, hence the
 emu10k1-gp.c module for it instead of the normal ns558.c one.
 
 3.15 SoundBlaster 64 and 128 - ES1370 and ES1371, ESS Solo1 and S3 SonicVibes

Documentation/intel_txt.txt

@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ o  Tboot then applies an (optional) user-defined launch policy to
 o  Tboot adjusts the e820 table provided by the bootloader to reserve
    its own location in memory as well as to reserve certain other
    TXT-related regions.
-o  As part of it's launch, tboot DMA protects all of RAM (using the
+o  As part of its launch, tboot DMA protects all of RAM (using the
    VT-d PMRs).  Thus, the kernel must be booted with 'intel_iommu=on'
    in order to remove this blanket protection and use VT-d's
    page-level protection.

Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt

@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Expressions are listed in decreasing order of precedence.
 (7) Returns the result of max(/expr/, /expr/).
 
 An expression can have a value of 'n', 'm' or 'y' (or 0, 1, 2
-respectively for calculations). A menu entry becomes visible when it's
+respectively for calculations). A menu entry becomes visible when its
 expression evaluates to 'm' or 'y'.
 
 There are two types of symbols: constant and non-constant symbols.

Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt

@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Environment variables for 'silentoldconfig'
 KCONFIG_NOSILENTUPDATE
 --------------------------------------------------
 If this variable has a non-blank value, it prevents silent kernel
-config udpates (requires explicit updates).
+config updates (requires explicit updates).
 
 KCONFIG_AUTOCONFIG
 --------------------------------------------------

Documentation/kernel-docs.txt

@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@
        Author: Ingo Molnar, Gadi Oxman and Miguel de Icaza.
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=2391
        Keywords: RAID, MD driver.
-       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
+       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is its
        abstract: "A description of the implementation of the RAID-1,
        RAID-4 and RAID-5 personalities of the MD device driver in the
        Linux kernel, providing users with high performance and reliable,
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1219
        Keywords: device driver, module, loading/unloading modules,
        allocating resources.
-       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
+       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is its
        abstract: "This is the first of a series of four articles
        co-authored by Alessandro Rubini and Georg Zezchwitz which present
        a practical approach to writing Linux device drivers as kernel
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@
        Keywords: character driver, init_module, clean_up module,
        autodetection, mayor number, minor number, file operations,
        open(), close().
-       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
+       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is its
        abstract: "This article, the second of four, introduces part of
        the actual code to create custom module implementing a character
        device driver. It describes the code for module initialization and
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1221
        Keywords: read(), write(), select(), ioctl(), blocking/non
        blocking mode, interrupt handler.
-       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
+       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is its
        abstract: "This article, the third of four on writing character
        device drivers, introduces concepts of reading, writing, and using
        ioctl-calls".
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@
        Author: Alessandro Rubini and Georg v. Zezschwitz.
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1222
        Keywords: interrupts, irqs, DMA, bottom halves, task queues.
-       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
+       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is its
        abstract: "This is the fourth in a series of articles about
        writing character device drivers as loadable kernel modules. This
        month, we further investigate the field of interrupt handling.

Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt

@@ -58,6 +58,7 @@ parameter is applicable:
 	ISAPNP	ISA PnP code is enabled.
 	ISDN	Appropriate ISDN support is enabled.
 	JOY	Appropriate joystick support is enabled.
+	KGDB	Kernel debugger support is enabled.
 	KVM	Kernel Virtual Machine support is enabled.
 	LIBATA  Libata driver is enabled
 	LP	Printer support is enabled.
@@ -99,6 +100,7 @@ parameter is applicable:
 	SWSUSP	Software suspend (hibernation) is enabled.
 	SUSPEND	System suspend states are enabled.
 	FTRACE	Function tracing enabled.
+	TPM	TPM drivers are enabled.
 	TS	Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled.
 	UMS	USB Mass Storage support is enabled.
 	USB	USB support is enabled.
@@ -151,6 +153,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			strict -- Be less tolerant of platforms that are not
 				strictly ACPI specification compliant.
 			rsdt -- prefer RSDT over (default) XSDT
+			copy_dsdt -- copy DSDT to memory
 
 			See also Documentation/power/pm.txt, pci=noacpi
 
@@ -710,6 +713,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			The VGA output is eventually overwritten by the real
 			console.
 
+	ekgdboc=	[X86,KGDB] Allow early kernel console debugging
+			ekgdboc=kbd
+
+			This is desgined to be used in conjunction with
+			the boot argument: earlyprintk=vga
+
 	eata=		[HW,SCSI]
 
 	edd=		[EDD]
@@ -1118,10 +1127,26 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			use the HighMem zone if it exists, and the Normal
 			zone if it does not.
 
-	kgdboc=		[HW] kgdb over consoles.
-			Requires a tty driver that supports console polling.
-			(only serial supported for now)
-			Format: <serial_device>[,baud]
+	kgdbdbgp=	[KGDB,HW] kgdb over EHCI usb debug port.
+			Format: <Controller#>[,poll interval]
+			The controller # is the number of the ehci usb debug
+			port as it is probed via PCI.  The poll interval is
+			optional and is the number seconds in between
+			each poll cycle to the debug port in case you need
+			the functionality for interrupting the kernel with
+			gdb or control-c on the dbgp connection.  When
+			not using this parameter you use sysrq-g to break into
+			the kernel debugger.
+
+	kgdboc=		[KGDB,HW] kgdb over consoles.
+			Requires a tty driver that supports console polling,
+			or a supported polling keyboard driver (non-usb).
+			Serial only format: <serial_device>[,baud]
+			keyboard only format: kbd
+			keyboard and serial format: kbd,<serial_device>[,baud]
+
+	kgdbwait	[KGDB] Stop kernel execution and enter the
+			kernel debugger at the earliest opportunity.
 
 	kmac=		[MIPS] korina ethernet MAC address.
 			Configure the RouterBoard 532 series on-chip
@@ -2616,6 +2641,15 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
 	tp720=		[HW,PS2]
 
+	tpm_suspend_pcr=[HW,TPM]
+			Format: integer pcr id
+			Specify that at suspend time, the tpm driver
+			should extend the specified pcr with zeros,
+			as a workaround for some chips which fail to
+			flush the last written pcr on TPM_SaveState.
+			This will guarantee that all the other pcrs
+			are saved.
+
 	trace_buf_size=nn[KMG]
 			[FTRACE] will set tracing buffer size.
 

Documentation/kprobes.txt

@@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ occurs during execution of kp->pre_handler or kp->post_handler,
 or during single-stepping of the probed instruction, Kprobes calls
 kp->fault_handler.  Any or all handlers can be NULL. If kp->flags
 is set KPROBE_FLAG_DISABLED, that kp will be registered but disabled,
-so, it's handlers aren't hit until calling enable_kprobe(kp).
+so, its handlers aren't hit until calling enable_kprobe(kp).
 
 NOTE:
 1. With the introduction of the "symbol_name" field to struct kprobe,

Documentation/kvm/api.txt

@@ -656,6 +656,7 @@ struct kvm_clock_data {
 4.29 KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS
+Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW
 Architectures: x86
 Type: vm ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_vcpu_event (out)
@@ -676,7 +677,7 @@ struct kvm_vcpu_events {
 		__u8 injected;
 		__u8 nr;
 		__u8 soft;
-		__u8 pad;
+		__u8 shadow;
 	} interrupt;
 	struct {
 		__u8 injected;
@@ -688,9 +689,13 @@ struct kvm_vcpu_events {
 	__u32 flags;
 };
 
+KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW may be set in the flags field to signal that
+interrupt.shadow contains a valid state. Otherwise, this field is undefined.
+
 4.30 KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS
+Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW
 Architectures: x86
 Type: vm ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_vcpu_event (in)
@@ -709,6 +714,183 @@ current in-kernel state. The bits are:
 KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_NMI_PENDING - transfer nmi.pending to the kernel
 KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SIPI_VECTOR - transfer sipi_vector
 
+If KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW is available, KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW can be set in
+the flags field to signal that interrupt.shadow contains a valid state and
+shall be written into the VCPU.
+
+4.32 KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_debugregs (out)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+Reads debug registers from the vcpu.
+
+struct kvm_debugregs {
+	__u64 db[4];
+	__u64 dr6;
+	__u64 dr7;
+	__u64 flags;
+	__u64 reserved[9];
+};
+
+4.33 KVM_SET_DEBUGREGS
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_debugregs (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+Writes debug registers into the vcpu.
+
+See KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS for the data structure. The flags field is unused
+yet and must be cleared on entry.
+
+4.34 KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_USER_MEM
+Architectures: all
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_userspace_memory_region (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+struct kvm_userspace_memory_region {
+	__u32 slot;
+	__u32 flags;
+	__u64 guest_phys_addr;
+	__u64 memory_size; /* bytes */
+	__u64 userspace_addr; /* start of the userspace allocated memory */
+};
+
+/* for kvm_memory_region::flags */
+#define KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES  1UL
+
+This ioctl allows the user to create or modify a guest physical memory
+slot.  When changing an existing slot, it may be moved in the guest
+physical memory space, or its flags may be modified.  It may not be
+resized.  Slots may not overlap in guest physical address space.
+
+Memory for the region is taken starting at the address denoted by the
+field userspace_addr, which must point at user addressable memory for
+the entire memory slot size.  Any object may back this memory, including
+anonymous memory, ordinary files, and hugetlbfs.
+
+It is recommended that the lower 21 bits of guest_phys_addr and userspace_addr
+be identical.  This allows large pages in the guest to be backed by large
+pages in the host.
+
+The flags field supports just one flag, KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES, which
+instructs kvm to keep track of writes to memory within the slot.  See
+the KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG ioctl.
+
+When the KVM_CAP_SYNC_MMU capability, changes in the backing of the memory
+region are automatically reflected into the guest.  For example, an mmap()
+that affects the region will be made visible immediately.  Another example
+is madvise(MADV_DROP).
+
+It is recommended to use this API instead of the KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION ioctl.
+The KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION does not allow fine grained control over memory
+allocation and is deprecated.
+
+4.35 KVM_SET_TSS_ADDR
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_TSS_ADDR
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: unsigned long tss_address (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+This ioctl defines the physical address of a three-page region in the guest
+physical address space.  The region must be within the first 4GB of the
+guest physical address space and must not conflict with any memory slot
+or any mmio address.  The guest may malfunction if it accesses this memory
+region.
+
+This ioctl is required on Intel-based hosts.  This is needed on Intel hardware
+because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals
+documentation when it pops into existence).
+
+4.36 KVM_ENABLE_CAP
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_ENABLE_CAP
+Architectures: ppc
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_enable_cap (in)
+Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
+
++Not all extensions are enabled by default. Using this ioctl the application
+can enable an extension, making it available to the guest.
+
+On systems that do not support this ioctl, it always fails. On systems that
+do support it, it only works for extensions that are supported for enablement.
+
+To check if a capability can be enabled, the KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl should
+be used.
+
+struct kvm_enable_cap {
+       /* in */
+       __u32 cap;
+
+The capability that is supposed to get enabled.
+
+       __u32 flags;
+
+A bitfield indicating future enhancements. Has to be 0 for now.
+
+       __u64 args[4];
+
+Arguments for enabling a feature. If a feature needs initial values to
+function properly, this is the place to put them.
+
+       __u8  pad[64];
+};
+
+4.37 KVM_GET_MP_STATE
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE
+Architectures: x86, ia64
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_mp_state (out)
+Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
+
+struct kvm_mp_state {
+	__u32 mp_state;
+};
+
+Returns the vcpu's current "multiprocessing state" (though also valid on
+uniprocessor guests).
+
+Possible values are:
+
+ - KVM_MP_STATE_RUNNABLE:        the vcpu is currently running
+ - KVM_MP_STATE_UNINITIALIZED:   the vcpu is an application processor (AP)
+                                 which has not yet received an INIT signal
+ - KVM_MP_STATE_INIT_RECEIVED:   the vcpu has received an INIT signal, and is
+                                 now ready for a SIPI
+ - KVM_MP_STATE_HALTED:          the vcpu has executed a HLT instruction and
+                                 is waiting for an interrupt
+ - KVM_MP_STATE_SIPI_RECEIVED:   the vcpu has just received a SIPI (vector
+                                 accesible via KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS)
+
+This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP.  Without an in-kernel
+irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace.
+
+4.38 KVM_SET_MP_STATE
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE
+Architectures: x86, ia64
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_mp_state (in)
+Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
+
+Sets the vcpu's current "multiprocessing state"; see KVM_GET_MP_STATE for
+arguments.
+
+This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP.  Without an in-kernel
+irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace.
 
 5. The kvm_run structure
 
@@ -820,6 +1002,13 @@ executed a memory-mapped I/O instruction which could not be satisfied
 by kvm.  The 'data' member contains the written data if 'is_write' is
 true, and should be filled by application code otherwise.
 
+NOTE: For KVM_EXIT_IO, KVM_EXIT_MMIO and KVM_EXIT_OSI, the corresponding
+operations are complete (and guest state is consistent) only after userspace
+has re-entered the kernel with KVM_RUN.  The kernel side will first finish
+incomplete operations and then check for pending signals.  Userspace
+can re-enter the guest with an unmasked signal pending to complete
+pending operations.
+
 		/* KVM_EXIT_HYPERCALL */
 		struct {
 			__u64 nr;
@@ -829,7 +1018,9 @@ true, and should be filled by application code otherwise.
 			__u32 pad;
 		} hypercall;
 
-Unused.
+Unused.  This was once used for 'hypercall to userspace'.  To implement
+such functionality, use KVM_EXIT_IO (x86) or KVM_EXIT_MMIO (all except s390).
+Note KVM_EXIT_IO is significantly faster than KVM_EXIT_MMIO.
 
 		/* KVM_EXIT_TPR_ACCESS */
 		struct {
@@ -870,6 +1061,19 @@ s390 specific.
 
 powerpc specific.
 
+		/* KVM_EXIT_OSI */
+		struct {
+			__u64 gprs[32];
+		} osi;
+
+MOL uses a special hypercall interface it calls 'OSI'. To enable it, we catch
+hypercalls and exit with this exit struct that contains all the guest gprs.
+
+If exit_reason is KVM_EXIT_OSI, then the vcpu has triggered such a hypercall.
+Userspace can now handle the hypercall and when it's done modify the gprs as
+necessary. Upon guest entry all guest GPRs will then be replaced by the values
+in this struct.
+
 		/* Fix the size of the union. */
 		char padding[256];
 	};

Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+KVM CPUID bits
+Glauber Costa <glommer@redhat.com>, Red Hat Inc, 2010
+=====================================================
+
+A guest running on a kvm host, can check some of its features using
+cpuid. This is not always guaranteed to work, since userspace can
+mask-out some, or even all KVM-related cpuid features before launching
+a guest.
+
+KVM cpuid functions are:
+
+function: KVM_CPUID_SIGNATURE (0x40000000)
+returns : eax = 0,
+          ebx = 0x4b4d564b,
+          ecx = 0x564b4d56,
+          edx = 0x4d.
+Note that this value in ebx, ecx and edx corresponds to the string "KVMKVMKVM".
+This function queries the presence of KVM cpuid leafs.
+
+
+function: define KVM_CPUID_FEATURES (0x40000001)
+returns : ebx, ecx, edx = 0
+          eax = and OR'ed group of (1 << flag), where each flags is:
+
+
+flag                               || value || meaning
+=============================================================================
+KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE            ||     0 || kvmclock available at msrs
+                                   ||       || 0x11 and 0x12.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+KVM_FEATURE_NOP_IO_DELAY           ||     1 || not necessary to perform delays
+                                   ||       || on PIO operations.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+KVM_FEATURE_MMU_OP                 ||     2 || deprecated.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE2           ||     3 || kvmclock available at msrs
+                                   ||       || 0x4b564d00 and 0x4b564d01
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE_STABLE_BIT ||    24 || host will warn if no guest-side
+                                   ||       || per-cpu warps are expected in
+                                   ||       || kvmclock.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Documentation/kvm/mmu.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,304 @@
+The x86 kvm shadow mmu
+======================
+
+The mmu (in arch/x86/kvm, files mmu.[ch] and paging_tmpl.h) is responsible
+for presenting a standard x86 mmu to the guest, while translating guest
+physical addresses to host physical addresses.
+
+The mmu code attempts to satisfy the following requirements:
+
+- correctness: the guest should not be able to determine that it is running
+               on an emulated mmu except for timing (we attempt to comply
+               with the specification, not emulate the characteristics of
+               a particular implementation such as tlb size)
+- security:    the guest must not be able to touch host memory not assigned
+               to it
+- performance: minimize the performance penalty imposed by the mmu
+- scaling:     need to scale to large memory and large vcpu guests
+- hardware:    support the full range of x86 virtualization hardware
+- integration: Linux memory management code must be in control of guest memory
+               so that swapping, page migration, page merging, transparent
+               hugepages, and similar features work without change
+- dirty tracking: report writes to guest memory to enable live migration
+               and framebuffer-based displays
+- footprint:   keep the amount of pinned kernel memory low (most memory
+               should be shrinkable)
+- reliablity:  avoid multipage or GFP_ATOMIC allocations
+
+Acronyms
+========
+
+pfn   host page frame number
+hpa   host physical address
+hva   host virtual address
+gfn   guest frame number
+gpa   guest physical address
+gva   guest virtual address
+ngpa  nested guest physical address
+ngva  nested guest virtual address
+pte   page table entry (used also to refer generically to paging structure
+      entries)
+gpte  guest pte (referring to gfns)
+spte  shadow pte (referring to pfns)
+tdp   two dimensional paging (vendor neutral term for NPT and EPT)
+
+Virtual and real hardware supported
+===================================
+
+The mmu supports first-generation mmu hardware, which allows an atomic switch
+of the current paging mode and cr3 during guest entry, as well as
+two-dimensional paging (AMD's NPT and Intel's EPT).  The emulated hardware
+it exposes is the traditional 2/3/4 level x86 mmu, with support for global
+pages, pae, pse, pse36, cr0.wp, and 1GB pages.  Work is in progress to support
+exposing NPT capable hardware on NPT capable hosts.
+
+Translation
+===========
+
+The primary job of the mmu is to program the processor's mmu to translate
+addresses for the guest.  Different translations are required at different
+times:
+
+- when guest paging is disabled, we translate guest physical addresses to
+  host physical addresses (gpa->hpa)
+- when guest paging is enabled, we translate guest virtual addresses, to
+  guest physical addresses, to host physical addresses (gva->gpa->hpa)
+- when the guest launches a guest of its own, we translate nested guest
+  virtual addresses, to nested guest physical addresses, to guest physical
+  addresses, to host physical addresses (ngva->ngpa->gpa->hpa)
+
+The primary challenge is to encode between 1 and 3 translations into hardware
+that support only 1 (traditional) and 2 (tdp) translations.  When the
+number of required translations matches the hardware, the mmu operates in
+direct mode; otherwise it operates in shadow mode (see below).
+
+Memory
+======
+
+Guest memory (gpa) is part of the user address space of the process that is
+using kvm.  Userspace defines the translation between guest addresses and user
+addresses (gpa->hva); note that two gpas may alias to the same gva, but not
+vice versa.
+
+These gvas may be backed using any method available to the host: anonymous
+memory, file backed memory, and device memory.  Memory might be paged by the
+host at any time.
+
+Events
+======
+
+The mmu is driven by events, some from the guest, some from the host.
+
+Guest generated events:
+- writes to control registers (especially cr3)
+- invlpg/invlpga instruction execution
+- access to missing or protected translations
+
+Host generated events:
+- changes in the gpa->hpa translation (either through gpa->hva changes or
+  through hva->hpa changes)
+- memory pressure (the shrinker)
+
+Shadow pages
+============
+
+The principal data structure is the shadow page, 'struct kvm_mmu_page'.  A
+shadow page contains 512 sptes, which can be either leaf or nonleaf sptes.  A
+shadow page may contain a mix of leaf and nonleaf sptes.
+
+A nonleaf spte allows the hardware mmu to reach the leaf pages and
+is not related to a translation directly.  It points to other shadow pages.
+
+A leaf spte corresponds to either one or two translations encoded into
+one paging structure entry.  These are always the lowest level of the
+translation stack, with optional higher level translations left to NPT/EPT.
+Leaf ptes point at guest pages.
+
+The following table shows translations encoded by leaf ptes, with higher-level
+translations in parentheses:
+
+ Non-nested guests:
+  nonpaging:     gpa->hpa
+  paging:        gva->gpa->hpa
+  paging, tdp:   (gva->)gpa->hpa
+ Nested guests:
+  non-tdp:       ngva->gpa->hpa  (*)
+  tdp:           (ngva->)ngpa->gpa->hpa
+
+(*) the guest hypervisor will encode the ngva->gpa translation into its page
+    tables if npt is not present
+
+Shadow pages contain the following information:
+  role.level:
+    The level in the shadow paging hierarchy that this shadow page belongs to.
+    1=4k sptes, 2=2M sptes, 3=1G sptes, etc.
+  role.direct:
+    If set, leaf sptes reachable from this page are for a linear range.
+    Examples include real mode translation, large guest pages backed by small
+    host pages, and gpa->hpa translations when NPT or EPT is active.
+    The linear range starts at (gfn << PAGE_SHIFT) and its size is determined
+    by role.level (2MB for first level, 1GB for second level, 0.5TB for third
+    level, 256TB for fourth level)
+    If clear, this page corresponds to a guest page table denoted by the gfn
+    field.
+  role.quadrant:
+    When role.cr4_pae=0, the guest uses 32-bit gptes while the host uses 64-bit
+    sptes.  That means a guest page table contains more ptes than the host,
+    so multiple shadow pages are needed to shadow one guest page.
+    For first-level shadow pages, role.quadrant can be 0 or 1 and denotes the
+    first or second 512-gpte block in the guest page table.  For second-level
+    page tables, each 32-bit gpte is converted to two 64-bit sptes
+    (since each first-level guest page is shadowed by two first-level
+    shadow pages) so role.quadrant takes values in the range 0..3.  Each
+    quadrant maps 1GB virtual address space.
+  role.access:
+    Inherited guest access permissions in the form uwx.  Note execute
+    permission is positive, not negative.
+  role.invalid:
+    The page is invalid and should not be used.  It is a root page that is
+    currently pinned (by a cpu hardware register pointing to it); once it is
+    unpinned it will be destroyed.
+  role.cr4_pae:
+    Contains the value of cr4.pae for which the page is valid (e.g. whether
+    32-bit or 64-bit gptes are in use).
+  role.cr4_nxe:
+    Contains the value of efer.nxe for which the page is valid.
+  role.cr0_wp:
+    Contains the value of cr0.wp for which the page is valid.
+  gfn:
+    Either the guest page table containing the translations shadowed by this
+    page, or the base page frame for linear translations.  See role.direct.
+  spt:
+    A pageful of 64-bit sptes containing the translations for this page.
+    Accessed by both kvm and hardware.
+    The page pointed to by spt will have its page->private pointing back
+    at the shadow page structure.
+    sptes in spt point either at guest pages, or at lower-level shadow pages.
+    Specifically, if sp1 and sp2 are shadow pages, then sp1->spt[n] may point
+    at __pa(sp2->spt).  sp2 will point back at sp1 through parent_pte.
+    The spt array forms a DAG structure with the shadow page as a node, and
+    guest pages as leaves.
+  gfns:
+    An array of 512 guest frame numbers, one for each present pte.  Used to
+    perform a reverse map from a pte to a gfn.
+  slot_bitmap:
+    A bitmap containing one bit per memory slot.  If the page contains a pte
+    mapping a page from memory slot n, then bit n of slot_bitmap will be set
+    (if a page is aliased among several slots, then it is not guaranteed that
+    all slots will be marked).
+    Used during dirty logging to avoid scanning a shadow page if none if its
+    pages need tracking.
+  root_count:
+    A counter keeping track of how many hardware registers (guest cr3 or
+    pdptrs) are now pointing at the page.  While this counter is nonzero, the
+    page cannot be destroyed.  See role.invalid.
+  multimapped:
+    Whether there exist multiple sptes pointing at this page.
+  parent_pte/parent_ptes:
+    If multimapped is zero, parent_pte points at the single spte that points at
+    this page's spt.  Otherwise, parent_ptes points at a data structure
+    with a list of parent_ptes.
+  unsync:
+    If true, then the translations in this page may not match the guest's
+    translation.  This is equivalent to the state of the tlb when a pte is
+    changed but before the tlb entry is flushed.  Accordingly, unsync ptes
+    are synchronized when the guest executes invlpg or flushes its tlb by
+    other means.  Valid for leaf pages.
+  unsync_children:
+    How many sptes in the page point at pages that are unsync (or have
+    unsynchronized children).
+  unsync_child_bitmap:
+    A bitmap indicating which sptes in spt point (directly or indirectly) at
+    pages that may be unsynchronized.  Used to quickly locate all unsychronized
+    pages reachable from a given page.
+
+Reverse map
+===========
+
+The mmu maintains a reverse mapping whereby all ptes mapping a page can be
+reached given its gfn.  This is used, for example, when swapping out a page.
+
+Synchronized and unsynchronized pages
+=====================================
+
+The guest uses two events to synchronize its tlb and page tables: tlb flushes
+and page invalidations (invlpg).
+
+A tlb flush means that we need to synchronize all sptes reachable from the
+guest's cr3.  This is expensive, so we keep all guest page tables write
+protected, and synchronize sptes to gptes when a gpte is written.
+
+A special case is when a guest page table is reachable from the current
+guest cr3.  In this case, the guest is obliged to issue an invlpg instruction
+before using the translation.  We take advantage of that by removing write
+protection from the guest page, and allowing the guest to modify it freely.
+We synchronize modified gptes when the guest invokes invlpg.  This reduces
+the amount of emulation we have to do when the guest modifies multiple gptes,
+or when the a guest page is no longer used as a page table and is used for
+random guest data.
+
+As a side effect we have to resynchronize all reachable unsynchronized shadow
+pages on a tlb flush.
+
+
+Reaction to events
+==================
+
+- guest page fault (or npt page fault, or ept violation)
+
+This is the most complicated event.  The cause of a page fault can be:
+
+  - a true guest fault (the guest translation won't allow the access) (*)
+  - access to a missing translation
+  - access to a protected translation
+    - when logging dirty pages, memory is write protected
+    - synchronized shadow pages are write protected (*)
+  - access to untranslatable memory (mmio)
+
+  (*) not applicable in direct mode
+
+Handling a page fault is performed as follows:
+
+ - if needed, walk the guest page tables to determine the guest translation
+   (gva->gpa or ngpa->gpa)
+   - if permissions are insufficient, reflect the fault back to the guest
+ - determine the host page
+   - if this is an mmio request, there is no host page; call the emulator
+     to emulate the instruction instead
+ - walk the shadow page table to find the spte for the translation,
+   instantiating missing intermediate page tables as necessary
+ - try to unsynchronize the page
+   - if successful, we can let the guest continue and modify the gpte
+ - emulate the instruction
+   - if failed, unshadow the page and let the guest continue
+ - update any translations that were modified by the instruction
+
+invlpg handling:
+
+  - walk the shadow page hierarchy and drop affected translations
+  - try to reinstantiate the indicated translation in the hope that the
+    guest will use it in the near future
+
+Guest control register updates:
+
+- mov to cr3
+  - look up new shadow roots
+  - synchronize newly reachable shadow pages
+
+- mov to cr0/cr4/efer
+  - set up mmu context for new paging mode
+  - look up new shadow roots
+  - synchronize newly reachable shadow pages
+
+Host translation updates:
+
+  - mmu notifier called with updated hva
+  - look up affected sptes through reverse map
+  - drop (or update) translations
+
+Further reading
+===============
+
+- NPT presentation from KVM Forum 2008
+  http://www.linux-kvm.org/wiki/images/c/c8/KvmForum2008%24kdf2008_21.pdf
+

Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt

@@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Tips & Tricks
 * Drew Scott Daniels observed: "I don't know why, but when I decrease the number
   of colours that my display uses it consumes less battery power. I've seen
   this on powerbooks too. I hope that this is a piece of information that
-  might be useful to the Laptop Mode patch or it's users."
+  might be useful to the Laptop Mode patch or its users."
 
 * In syslog.conf, you can prefix entries with a dash ``-'' to omit syncing the
   file after every logging. When you're using laptop-mode and your disk doesn't

Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt

@@ -292,13 +292,13 @@ sysfs notes:
 
 		Warning: when in NVRAM mode, the volume up/down/mute
 		keys are synthesized according to changes in the mixer,
-		so you have to use volume up or volume down to unmute,
-		as per the ThinkPad volume mixer user interface.  When
-		in ACPI event mode, volume up/down/mute are reported as
-		separate events, but this behaviour may be corrected in
-		future releases of this driver, in which case the
-		ThinkPad volume mixer user interface semantics will be
-		enforced.
+		which uses a single volume up or volume down hotkey
+		press to unmute, as per the ThinkPad volume mixer user
+		interface.  When in ACPI event mode, volume up/down/mute
+		events are reported by the firmware and can behave
+		differently (and that behaviour changes with firmware
+		version -- not just with firmware models -- as well as
+		OSI(Linux) state).
 
 	hotkey_poll_freq:
 		frequency in Hz for hot key polling. It must be between
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ sysfs notes:
 		will cause hot key presses that require NVRAM polling
 		to never be reported.
 
-		Setting hotkey_poll_freq too low will cause repeated
+		Setting hotkey_poll_freq too low may cause repeated
 		pressings of the same hot key to be misreported as a
 		single key press, or to not even be detected at all.
 		The recommended polling frequency is 10Hz.
@@ -397,6 +397,7 @@ ACPI	Scan
 event	code	Key		Notes
 
 0x1001	0x00	FN+F1		-
+
 0x1002	0x01	FN+F2		IBM: battery (rare)
 				Lenovo: Screen lock
 
@@ -404,7 +405,8 @@ event	code	Key		Notes
 				this hot key, even with hot keys
 				disabled or with Fn+F3 masked
 				off
-				IBM: screen lock
+				IBM: screen lock, often turns
+				off the ThinkLight as side-effect
 				Lenovo: battery
 
 0x1004	0x03	FN+F4		Sleep button (ACPI sleep button
@@ -433,7 +435,8 @@ event	code	Key		Notes
 				Do you feel lucky today?
 
 0x1008	0x07	FN+F8		IBM: toggle screen expand
-				Lenovo: configure UltraNav
+				Lenovo: configure UltraNav,
+				or toggle screen expand
 
 0x1009	0x08	FN+F9		-
 	..	..		..
@@ -444,7 +447,7 @@ event	code	Key		Notes
 				either through the ACPI event,
 				or through a hotkey event.
 				The firmware may refuse to
-				generate further FN+F4 key
+				generate further FN+F12 key
 				press events until a S3 or S4
 				ACPI sleep cycle is performed,
 				or some time passes.
@@ -512,15 +515,19 @@ events for switches:
 SW_RFKILL_ALL	T60 and later hardware rfkill rocker switch
 SW_TABLET_MODE	Tablet ThinkPads HKEY events 0x5009 and 0x500A
 
-Non hot-key ACPI HKEY event map:
+Non hotkey ACPI HKEY event map:
+-------------------------------
+
+Events that are not propagated by the driver, except for legacy
+compatibility purposes when hotkey_report_mode is set to 1:
+
 0x5001		Lid closed
 0x5002		Lid opened
 0x5009		Tablet swivel: switched to tablet mode
 0x500A		Tablet swivel: switched to normal mode
 0x7000		Radio Switch may have changed state
 
-The above events are not propagated by the driver, except for legacy
-compatibility purposes when hotkey_report_mode is set to 1.
+Events that are never propagated by the driver:
 
 0x2304		System is waking up from suspend to undock
 0x2305		System is waking up from suspend to eject bay
@@ -528,14 +535,39 @@ compatibility purposes when hotkey_report_mode is set to 1.
 0x2405		System is waking up from hibernation to eject bay
 0x5010		Brightness level changed/control event
 
-The above events are never propagated by the driver.
+Events that are propagated by the driver to userspace:
 
+0x2313		ALARM: System is waking up from suspend because
+		the battery is nearly empty
+0x2413		ALARM: System is waking up from hibernation because
+		the battery is nearly empty
 0x3003		Bay ejection (see 0x2x05) complete, can sleep again
+0x3006		Bay hotplug request (hint to power up SATA link when
+		the optical drive tray is ejected)
 0x4003		Undocked (see 0x2x04), can sleep again
 0x500B		Tablet pen inserted into its storage bay
 0x500C		Tablet pen removed from its storage bay
-
-The above events are propagated by the driver.
+0x6011		ALARM: battery is too hot
+0x6012		ALARM: battery is extremely hot
+0x6021		ALARM: a sensor is too hot
+0x6022		ALARM: a sensor is extremely hot
+0x6030		System thermal table changed
+
+Battery nearly empty alarms are a last resort attempt to get the
+operating system to hibernate or shutdown cleanly (0x2313), or shutdown
+cleanly (0x2413) before power is lost.  They must be acted upon, as the
+wake up caused by the firmware will have negated most safety nets...
+
+When any of the "too hot" alarms happen, according to Lenovo the user
+should suspend or hibernate the laptop (and in the case of battery
+alarms, unplug the AC adapter) to let it cool down.  These alarms do
+signal that something is wrong, they should never happen on normal
+operating conditions.
+
+The "extremely hot" alarms are emergencies.  According to Lenovo, the
+operating system is to force either an immediate suspend or hibernate
+cycle, or a system shutdown.  Obviously, something is very wrong if this
+happens.
 
 Compatibility notes:
 

Documentation/lguest/lguest.c

@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static u8 *get_feature_bits(struct device *dev)
  * Launcher virtual with an offset.
  *
  * This can be tough to get your head around, but usually it just means that we
- * use these trivial conversion functions when the Guest gives us it's
+ * use these trivial conversion functions when the Guest gives us its
  * "physical" addresses:
  */
 static void *from_guest_phys(unsigned long addr)

Documentation/md.txt

@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ raid_disks != 0.
 
 Then uninitialized devices can be added with ADD_NEW_DISK.  The
 structure passed to ADD_NEW_DISK must specify the state of the device
-and it's role in the array.
+and its role in the array.
 
 Once started with RUN_ARRAY, uninitialized spares can be added with
 HOT_ADD_DISK.

Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt

@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ Depending on the exact configuration, translation between the network packet
 label and the internal LSM security identifier can be time consuming.  The
 NetLabel label mapping cache is a caching mechanism which can be used to
 sidestep much of this overhead once a mapping has been established.  Once the
-LSM has received a packet, used NetLabel to decode it's security attributes,
+LSM has received a packet, used NetLabel to decode its security attributes,
 and translated the security attributes into a LSM internal identifier the LSM
 can use the NetLabel caching functions to associate the LSM internal
 identifier with the network packet's label.  This means that in the future

Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+Linux CAIF
+===========
+copyright (C) ST-Ericsson AB 2010
+Author: Sjur Brendeland/ sjur.brandeland@stericsson.com
+License terms: GNU General Public License (GPL) version 2
+
+
+Introduction
+------------
+CAIF is a MUX protocol used by ST-Ericsson cellular modems for
+communication between Modem and host. The host processes can open virtual AT
+channels, initiate GPRS Data connections, Video channels and Utility Channels.
+The Utility Channels are general purpose pipes between modem and host.
+
+ST-Ericsson modems support a number of transports between modem
+and host. Currently, UART and Loopback are available for Linux.
+
+
+Architecture:
+------------
+The implementation of CAIF is divided into:
+* CAIF Socket Layer, Kernel API, and  Net Device.
+* CAIF Core Protocol Implementation
+* CAIF Link Layer, implemented as NET devices.
+
+
+  RTNL
+   !
+   !	 +------+   +------+   +------+
+   !	+------+!  +------+!  +------+!
+   !	! Sock !!  !Kernel!!  ! Net  !!
+   !	! API  !+  ! API  !+  ! Dev  !+	  <- CAIF Client APIs
+   !	+------+   +------!   +------+
+   !	   !	      !		 !
+   !	   +----------!----------+
+   !		   +------+		  <- CAIF Protocol Implementation
+   +------->	   ! CAIF !
+		   ! Core !
+		   +------+
+	     +--------!--------+
+	     !		       !
+	  +------+	    +-----+
+	  !    	 !	    ! TTY !	  <- Link Layer (Net Devices)
+	  +------+	    +-----+
+
+
+Using the Kernel API
+----------------------
+The Kernel API is used for accessing CAIF channels from the
+kernel.
+The user of the API has to implement two callbacks for receive
+and control.
+The receive callback gives a CAIF packet as a SKB. The control
+callback will
+notify of channel initialization complete, and flow-on/flow-
+off.
+
+
+  struct caif_device caif_dev = {
+    .caif_config = {
+     .name = "MYDEV"
+     .type = CAIF_CHTY_AT
+    }
+   .receive_cb = my_receive,
+   .control_cb = my_control,
+  };
+  caif_add_device(&caif_dev);
+  caif_transmit(&caif_dev, skb);
+
+See the caif_kernel.h for details about the CAIF kernel API.
+
+
+I M P L E M E N T A T I O N
+===========================
+===========================
+
+CAIF Core Protocol Layer
+=========================================
+
+CAIF Core layer implements the CAIF protocol as defined by ST-Ericsson.
+It implements the CAIF protocol stack in a layered approach, where
+each layer described in the specification is implemented as a separate layer.
+The architecture is inspired by the design patterns "Protocol Layer" and
+"Protocol Packet".
+
+== CAIF structure ==
+The Core CAIF implementation contains:
+      -	Simple implementation of CAIF.
+      -	Layered architecture (a la Streams), each layer in the CAIF
+	specification is implemented in a separate c-file.
+      -	Clients must implement PHY layer to access physical HW
+	with receive and transmit functions.
+      -	Clients must call configuration function to add PHY layer.
+      -	Clients must implement CAIF layer to consume/produce
+	CAIF payload with receive and transmit functions.
+      -	Clients must call configuration function to add and connect the
+	Client layer.
+      - When receiving / transmitting CAIF Packets (cfpkt), ownership is passed
+	to the called function (except for framing layers' receive functions
+	or if a transmit function returns an error, in which case the caller
+	must free the packet).
+
+Layered Architecture
+--------------------
+The CAIF protocol can be divided into two parts: Support functions and Protocol
+Implementation. The support functions include:
+
+      - CFPKT CAIF Packet. Implementation of CAIF Protocol Packet. The
+	CAIF Packet has functions for creating, destroying and adding content
+	and for adding/extracting header and trailers to protocol packets.
+
+      - CFLST CAIF list implementation.
+
+      - CFGLUE CAIF Glue. Contains OS Specifics, such as memory
+	allocation, endianness, etc.
+
+The CAIF Protocol implementation contains:
+
+      - CFCNFG CAIF Configuration layer. Configures the CAIF Protocol
+	Stack and provides a Client interface for adding Link-Layer and
+	Driver interfaces on top of the CAIF Stack.
+
+      - CFCTRL CAIF Control layer. Encodes and Decodes control messages
+	such as enumeration and channel setup. Also matches request and
+	response messages.
+
+      - CFSERVL General CAIF Service Layer functionality; handles flow
+	control and remote shutdown requests.
+
+      - CFVEI CAIF VEI layer. Handles CAIF AT Channels on VEI (Virtual
+        External Interface). This layer encodes/decodes VEI frames.
+
+      - CFDGML CAIF Datagram layer. Handles CAIF Datagram layer (IP
+	traffic), encodes/decodes Datagram frames.
+
+      - CFMUX CAIF Mux layer. Handles multiplexing between multiple
+	physical bearers and multiple channels such as VEI, Datagram, etc.
+	The MUX keeps track of the existing CAIF Channels and
+	Physical Instances and selects the apropriate instance based
+	on Channel-Id and Physical-ID.
+
+      - CFFRML CAIF Framing layer. Handles Framing i.e. Frame length
+	and frame checksum.
+
+      - CFSERL CAIF Serial layer. Handles concatenation/split of frames
+	into CAIF Frames with correct length.
+
+
+
+		    +---------+
+		    | Config  |
+		    | CFCNFG  |
+		    +---------+
+			 !
+    +---------+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+    |	AT    |	    | Control |	    | Datagram|
+    | CFVEIL  |	    | CFCTRL  |	    | CFDGML  |
+    +---------+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+	   \_____________!______________/
+			 !
+		    +---------+
+		    |	MUX   |
+		    |	      |
+		    +---------+
+		    _____!_____
+		   /	       \
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+	    | CFFRML  |	    | CFFRML  |
+	    | Framing |	    | Framing |
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+		 !		!
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+	    |         |	    | Serial  |
+	    |	      |	    | CFSERL  |
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+
+
+In this layered approach the following "rules" apply.
+      - All layers embed the same structure "struct cflayer"
+      - A layer does not depend on any other layer's private data.
+      - Layers are stacked by setting the pointers
+		  layer->up , layer->dn
+      -	In order to send data upwards, each layer should do
+		 layer->up->receive(layer->up, packet);
+      - In order to send data downwards, each layer should do
+		 layer->dn->transmit(layer->dn, packet);
+
+
+Linux Driver Implementation
+===========================
+
+Linux GPRS Net Device and CAIF socket are implemented on top of the
+CAIF Core protocol. The Net device and CAIF socket have an instance of
+'struct cflayer', just like the CAIF Core protocol stack.
+Net device and Socket implement the 'receive()' function defined by
+'struct cflayer', just like the rest of the CAIF stack. In this way, transmit and
+receive of packets is handled as by the rest of the layers: the 'dn->transmit()'
+function is called in order to transmit data.
+
+The layer on top of the CAIF Core implementation is
+sometimes referred to as the "Client layer".
+
+
+Configuration of Link Layer
+---------------------------
+The Link Layer is implemented as Linux net devices (struct net_device).
+Payload handling and registration is done using standard Linux mechanisms.
+
+The CAIF Protocol relies on a loss-less link layer without implementing
+retransmission. This implies that packet drops must not happen.
+Therefore a flow-control mechanism is implemented where the physical
+interface can initiate flow stop for all CAIF Channels.

Documentation/networking/caif/README

@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+Copyright (C) ST-Ericsson AB 2010
+Author: Sjur Brendeland/ sjur.brandeland@stericsson.com
+License terms: GNU General Public License (GPL) version 2
+---------------------------------------------------------
+
+=== Start ===
+If you have compiled CAIF for modules do:
+
+$modprobe crc_ccitt
+$modprobe caif
+$modprobe caif_socket
+$modprobe chnl_net
+
+
+=== Preparing the setup with a STE modem ===
+
+If you are working on integration of CAIF you should make sure
+that the kernel is built with module support.
+
+There are some things that need to be tweaked to get the host TTY correctly
+set up to talk to the modem.
+Since the CAIF stack is running in the kernel and we want to use the existing
+TTY, we are installing our physical serial driver as a line discipline above
+the TTY device.
+
+To achieve this we need to install the N_CAIF ldisc from user space.
+The benefit is that we can hook up to any TTY.
+
+The use of Start-of-frame-extension (STX) must also be set as
+module parameter "ser_use_stx".
+
+Normally Frame Checksum is always used on UART, but this is also provided as a
+module parameter "ser_use_fcs".
+
+$ modprobe caif_serial ser_ttyname=/dev/ttyS0 ser_use_stx=yes
+$ ifconfig caif_ttyS0 up
+
+PLEASE NOTE: 	There is a limitation in Android shell.
+		It only accepts one argument to insmod/modprobe!
+
+=== Trouble shooting ===
+
+There are debugfs parameters provided for serial communication.
+/sys/kernel/debug/caif_serial/<tty-name>/
+
+* ser_state:   Prints the bit-mask status where
+  - 0x02 means SENDING, this is a transient state.
+  - 0x10 means FLOW_OFF_SENT, i.e. the previous frame has not been sent
+	and is blocking further send operation. Flow OFF has been propagated
+	to all CAIF Channels using this TTY.
+
+* tty_status: Prints the bit-mask tty status information
+  - 0x01 - tty->warned is on.
+  - 0x02 - tty->low_latency is on.
+  - 0x04 - tty->packed is on.
+  - 0x08 - tty->flow_stopped is on.
+  - 0x10 - tty->hw_stopped is on.
+  - 0x20 - tty->stopped is on.
+
+* last_tx_msg: Binary blob Prints the last transmitted frame.
+	This can be printed with
+	$od --format=x1 /sys/kernel/debug/caif_serial/<tty>/last_rx_msg.
+	The first two tx messages sent look like this. Note: The initial
+	byte 02 is start of frame extension (STX) used for re-syncing
+	upon errors.
+
+  - Enumeration:
+        0000000  02 05 00 00 03 01 d2 02
+                 |  |     |  |  |  |
+                 STX(1)   |  |  |  |
+                    Length(2)|  |  |
+                          Control Channel(1)
+                             Command:Enumeration(1)
+                                Link-ID(1)
+                                    Checksum(2)
+  - Channel Setup:
+        0000000  02 07 00 00 00 21 a1 00 48 df
+                 |  |     |  |  |  |  |  |
+                 STX(1)   |  |  |  |  |  |
+                    Length(2)|  |  |  |  |
+                          Control Channel(1)
+                             Command:Channel Setup(1)
+                                Channel Type(1)
+                                    Priority and Link-ID(1)
+				      Endpoint(1)
+					  Checksum(2)
+
+* last_rx_msg: Prints the last transmitted frame.
+	The RX messages for LinkSetup look almost identical but they have the
+	bit 0x20 set in the command bit, and Channel Setup has added one byte
+	before Checksum containing Channel ID.
+	NOTE: Several CAIF Messages might be concatenated. The maximum debug
+	buffer size is 128 bytes.
+
+== Error Scenarios:
+- last_tx_msg contains channel setup message and last_rx_msg is empty ->
+  The host seems to be able to send over the UART, at least the CAIF ldisc get
+  notified that sending is completed.
+
+- last_tx_msg contains enumeration message and last_rx_msg is empty ->
+  The host is not able to send the message from UART, the tty has not been
+  able to complete the transmit operation.
+
+- if /sys/kernel/debug/caif_serial/<tty>/tty_status is non-zero there
+  might be problems transmitting over UART.
+  E.g. host and modem wiring is not correct you will typically see
+  tty_status = 0x10 (hw_stopped) and ser_state = 0x10 (FLOW_OFF_SENT).
+  You will probably see the enumeration message in last_tx_message
+  and empty last_rx_message.

Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c

@@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ static int enslave(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname)
 		 */
 		if (abi_ver < 1) {
 			/* For old ABI, the master needs to be
-			 * down before setting it's hwaddr
+			 * down before setting its hwaddr
 			 */
 			res = set_if_down(master_ifname, master_flags.ifr_flags);
 			if (res) {

Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt

@@ -588,6 +588,37 @@ ip_local_port_range - 2 INTEGERS
 	(i.e. by default) range 1024-4999 is enough to issue up to
 	2000 connections per second to systems supporting timestamps.
 
+ip_local_reserved_ports - list of comma separated ranges
+	Specify the ports which are reserved for known third-party
+	applications. These ports will not be used by automatic port
+	assignments (e.g. when calling connect() or bind() with port
+	number 0). Explicit port allocation behavior is unchanged.
+
+	The format used for both input and output is a comma separated
+	list of ranges (e.g. "1,2-4,10-10" for ports 1, 2, 3, 4 and
+	10). Writing to the file will clear all previously reserved
+	ports and update the current list with the one given in the
+	input.
+
+	Note that ip_local_port_range and ip_local_reserved_ports
+	settings are independent and both are considered by the kernel
+	when determining which ports are available for automatic port
+	assignments.
+
+	You can reserve ports which are not in the current
+	ip_local_port_range, e.g.:
+
+	$ cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_local_port_range
+	32000	61000
+	$ cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_local_reserved_ports
+	8080,9148
+
+	although this is redundant. However such a setting is useful
+	if later the port range is changed to a value that will
+	include the reserved ports.
+
+	Default: Empty
+
 ip_nonlocal_bind - BOOLEAN
 	If set, allows processes to bind() to non-local IP addresses,
 	which can be quite useful - but may break some applications.

Documentation/networking/l2tp.txt

@@ -1,44 +1,95 @@
-This brief document describes how to use the kernel's PPPoL2TP driver
-to provide L2TP functionality. L2TP is a protocol that tunnels one or
-more PPP sessions over a UDP tunnel. It is commonly used for VPNs
+This document describes how to use the kernel's L2TP drivers to
+provide L2TP functionality. L2TP is a protocol that tunnels one or
+more sessions over an IP tunnel. It is commonly used for VPNs
 (L2TP/IPSec) and by ISPs to tunnel subscriber PPP sessions over an IP
-network infrastructure.
+network infrastructure. With L2TPv3, it is also useful as a Layer-2
+tunneling infrastructure.
+
+Features
+========
+
+L2TPv2 (PPP over L2TP (UDP tunnels)).
+L2TPv3 ethernet pseudowires.
+L2TPv3 PPP pseudowires.
+L2TPv3 IP encapsulation.
+Netlink sockets for L2TPv3 configuration management.
+
+History
+=======
+
+The original pppol2tp driver was introduced in 2.6.23 and provided
+L2TPv2 functionality (rfc2661). L2TPv2 is used to tunnel one or more PPP
+sessions over a UDP tunnel.
+
+L2TPv3 (rfc3931) changes the protocol to allow different frame types
+to be passed over an L2TP tunnel by moving the PPP-specific parts of
+the protocol out of the core L2TP packet headers. Each frame type is
+known as a pseudowire type. Ethernet, PPP, HDLC, Frame Relay and ATM
+pseudowires for L2TP are defined in separate RFC standards. Another
+change for L2TPv3 is that it can be carried directly over IP with no
+UDP header (UDP is optional). It is also possible to create static
+unmanaged L2TPv3 tunnels manually without a control protocol
+(userspace daemon) to manage them.
+
+To support L2TPv3, the original pppol2tp driver was split up to
+separate the L2TP and PPP functionality. Existing L2TPv2 userspace
+apps should be unaffected as the original pppol2tp sockets API is
+retained. L2TPv3, however, uses netlink to manage L2TPv3 tunnels and
+sessions.
 
 Design
 ======
 
-The PPPoL2TP driver, drivers/net/pppol2tp.c, provides a mechanism by
-which PPP frames carried through an L2TP session are passed through
-the kernel's PPP subsystem. The standard PPP daemon, pppd, handles all
-PPP interaction with the peer. PPP network interfaces are created for
-each local PPP endpoint.
-
-The L2TP protocol http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2661.html defines L2TP
-control and data frames. L2TP control frames carry messages between
-L2TP clients/servers and are used to setup / teardown tunnels and
-sessions. An L2TP client or server is implemented in userspace and
-will use a regular UDP socket per tunnel. L2TP data frames carry PPP
-frames, which may be PPP control or PPP data. The kernel's PPP
+The L2TP protocol separates control and data frames.  The L2TP kernel
+drivers handle only L2TP data frames; control frames are always
+handled by userspace. L2TP control frames carry messages between L2TP
+clients/servers and are used to setup / teardown tunnels and
+sessions. An L2TP client or server is implemented in userspace.
+
+Each L2TP tunnel is implemented using a UDP or L2TPIP socket; L2TPIP
+provides L2TPv3 IP encapsulation (no UDP) and is implemented using a
+new l2tpip socket family. The tunnel socket is typically created by
+userspace, though for unmanaged L2TPv3 tunnels, the socket can also be
+created by the kernel. Each L2TP session (pseudowire) gets a network
+interface instance. In the case of PPP, these interfaces are created
+indirectly by pppd using a pppol2tp socket. In the case of ethernet,
+the netdevice is created upon a netlink request to create an L2TPv3
+ethernet pseudowire.
+
+For PPP, the PPPoL2TP driver, net/l2tp/l2tp_ppp.c, provides a
+mechanism by which PPP frames carried through an L2TP session are
+passed through the kernel's PPP subsystem. The standard PPP daemon,
+pppd, handles all PPP interaction with the peer. PPP network
+interfaces are created for each local PPP endpoint. The kernel's PPP
 subsystem arranges for PPP control frames to be delivered to pppd,
 while data frames are forwarded as usual.
 
+For ethernet, the L2TPETH driver, net/l2tp/l2tp_eth.c, implements a
+netdevice driver, managing virtual ethernet devices, one per
+pseudowire. These interfaces can be managed using standard Linux tools
+such as "ip" and "ifconfig". If only IP frames are passed over the
+tunnel, the interface can be given an IP addresses of itself and its
+peer. If non-IP frames are to be passed over the tunnel, the interface
+can be added to a bridge using brctl. All L2TP datapath protocol
+functions are handled by the L2TP core driver.
+
 Each tunnel and session within a tunnel is assigned a unique tunnel_id
 and session_id. These ids are carried in the L2TP header of every
-control and data packet. The pppol2tp driver uses them to lookup
-internal tunnel and/or session contexts. Zero tunnel / session ids are
-treated specially - zero ids are never assigned to tunnels or sessions
-in the network. In the driver, the tunnel context keeps a pointer to
-the tunnel UDP socket. The session context keeps a pointer to the
-PPPoL2TP socket, as well as other data that lets the driver interface
-to the kernel PPP subsystem.
-
-Note that the pppol2tp kernel driver handles only L2TP data frames;
-L2TP control frames are simply passed up to userspace in the UDP
-tunnel socket. The kernel handles all datapath aspects of the
-protocol, including data packet resequencing (if enabled).
-
-There are a number of requirements on the userspace L2TP daemon in
-order to use the pppol2tp driver.
+control and data packet. (Actually, in L2TPv3, the tunnel_id isn't
+present in data frames - it is inferred from the IP connection on
+which the packet was received.) The L2TP driver uses the ids to lookup
+internal tunnel and/or session contexts to determine how to handle the
+packet. Zero tunnel / session ids are treated specially - zero ids are
+never assigned to tunnels or sessions in the network. In the driver,
+the tunnel context keeps a reference to the tunnel UDP or L2TPIP
+socket. The session context holds data that lets the driver interface
+to the kernel's network frame type subsystems, i.e. PPP, ethernet.
+
+Userspace Programming
+=====================
+
+For L2TPv2, there are a number of requirements on the userspace L2TP
+daemon in order to use the pppol2tp driver.
 
 1. Use a UDP socket per tunnel.
 
@@ -86,6 +137,35 @@ In addition to the standard PPP ioctls, a PPPIOCGL2TPSTATS is provided
 to retrieve tunnel and session statistics from the kernel using the
 PPPoX socket of the appropriate tunnel or session.
 
+For L2TPv3, userspace must use the netlink API defined in
+include/linux/l2tp.h to manage tunnel and session contexts. The
+general procedure to create a new L2TP tunnel with one session is:-
+
+1. Open a GENL socket using L2TP_GENL_NAME for configuring the kernel
+   using netlink.
+
+2. Create a UDP or L2TPIP socket for the tunnel.
+
+3. Create a new L2TP tunnel using a L2TP_CMD_TUNNEL_CREATE
+   request. Set attributes according to desired tunnel parameters,
+   referencing the UDP or L2TPIP socket created in the previous step.
+
+4. Create a new L2TP session in the tunnel using a
+   L2TP_CMD_SESSION_CREATE request.
+
+The tunnel and all of its sessions are closed when the tunnel socket
+is closed. The netlink API may also be used to delete sessions and
+tunnels. Configuration and status info may be set or read using netlink.
+
+The L2TP driver also supports static (unmanaged) L2TPv3 tunnels. These
+are where there is no L2TP control message exchange with the peer to
+setup the tunnel; the tunnel is configured manually at each end of the
+tunnel. There is no need for an L2TP userspace application in this
+case -- the tunnel socket is created by the kernel and configured
+using parameters sent in the L2TP_CMD_TUNNEL_CREATE netlink
+request. The "ip" utility of iproute2 has commands for managing static
+L2TPv3 tunnels; do "ip l2tp help" for more information.
+
 Debugging
 =========
 
@@ -102,6 +182,69 @@ PPPOL2TP_MSG_CONTROL  userspace - kernel interface
 PPPOL2TP_MSG_SEQ      sequence numbers handling
 PPPOL2TP_MSG_DATA     data packets
 
+If enabled, files under a l2tp debugfs directory can be used to dump
+kernel state about L2TP tunnels and sessions. To access it, the
+debugfs filesystem must first be mounted.
+
+# mount -t debugfs debugfs /debug
+
+Files under the l2tp directory can then be accessed.
+
+# cat /debug/l2tp/tunnels
+
+The debugfs files should not be used by applications to obtain L2TP
+state information because the file format is subject to change. It is
+implemented to provide extra debug information to help diagnose
+problems.) Users should use the netlink API.
+
+/proc/net/pppol2tp is also provided for backwards compaibility with
+the original pppol2tp driver. It lists information about L2TPv2
+tunnels and sessions only. Its use is discouraged.
+
+Unmanaged L2TPv3 Tunnels
+========================
+
+Some commercial L2TP products support unmanaged L2TPv3 ethernet
+tunnels, where there is no L2TP control protocol; tunnels are
+configured at each side manually. New commands are available in
+iproute2's ip utility to support this.
+
+To create an L2TPv3 ethernet pseudowire between local host 192.168.1.1
+and peer 192.168.1.2, using IP addresses 10.5.1.1 and 10.5.1.2 for the
+tunnel endpoints:-
+
+# modprobe l2tp_eth
+# modprobe l2tp_netlink
+
+# ip l2tp add tunnel tunnel_id 1 peer_tunnel_id 1 udp_sport 5000 \
+  udp_dport 5000 encap udp local 192.168.1.1 remote 192.168.1.2
+# ip l2tp add session tunnel_id 1 session_id 1 peer_session_id 1
+# ifconfig -a
+# ip addr add 10.5.1.2/32 peer 10.5.1.1/32 dev l2tpeth0
+# ifconfig l2tpeth0 up
+
+Choose IP addresses to be the address of a local IP interface and that
+of the remote system. The IP addresses of the l2tpeth0 interface can be
+anything suitable.
+
+Repeat the above at the peer, with ports, tunnel/session ids and IP
+addresses reversed.  The tunnel and session IDs can be any non-zero
+32-bit number, but the values must be reversed at the peer.
+
+Host 1                         Host2
+udp_sport=5000                 udp_sport=5001
+udp_dport=5001                 udp_dport=5000
+tunnel_id=42                   tunnel_id=45
+peer_tunnel_id=45              peer_tunnel_id=42
+session_id=128                 session_id=5196755
+peer_session_id=5196755        peer_session_id=128
+
+When done at both ends of the tunnel, it should be possible to send
+data over the network. e.g.
+
+# ping 10.5.1.1
+
+
 Sample Userspace Code
 =====================
 
@@ -158,12 +301,48 @@ Sample Userspace Code
         }
         return 0;
 
+Internal Implementation
+=======================
+
+The driver keeps a struct l2tp_tunnel context per L2TP tunnel and a
+struct l2tp_session context for each session. The l2tp_tunnel is
+always associated with a UDP or L2TP/IP socket and keeps a list of
+sessions in the tunnel. The l2tp_session context keeps kernel state
+about the session. It has private data which is used for data specific
+to the session type. With L2TPv2, the session always carried PPP
+traffic. With L2TPv3, the session can also carry ethernet frames
+(ethernet pseudowire) or other data types such as ATM, HDLC or Frame
+Relay.
+
+When a tunnel is first opened, the reference count on the socket is
+increased using sock_hold(). This ensures that the kernel socket
+cannot be removed while L2TP's data structures reference it.
+
+Some L2TP sessions also have a socket (PPP pseudowires) while others
+do not (ethernet pseudowires). We can't use the socket reference count
+as the reference count for session contexts. The L2TP implementation
+therefore has its own internal reference counts on the session
+contexts.
+
+To Do
+=====
+
+Add L2TP tunnel switching support. This would route tunneled traffic
+from one L2TP tunnel into another. Specified in
+http://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-l2tpext-tunnel-switching-08
+
+Add L2TPv3 VLAN pseudowire support.
+
+Add L2TPv3 IP pseudowire support.
+
+Add L2TPv3 ATM pseudowire support.
+
 Miscellaneous
-============
+=============
 
-The PPPoL2TP driver was developed as part of the OpenL2TP project by
+The L2TP drivers were developed as part of the OpenL2TP project by
 Katalix Systems Ltd. OpenL2TP is a full-featured L2TP client / server,
 designed from the ground up to have the L2TP datapath in the
 kernel. The project also implemented the pppol2tp plugin for pppd
 which allows pppd to use the kernel driver. Details can be found at
-http://openl2tp.sourceforge.net.
+http://www.openl2tp.org.

Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt

@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ by the kernel.
 The destruction of the socket and all associated resources
 is done by a simple call to close(fd).
 
-Next I will describe PACKET_MMAP settings and it's constraints,
+Next I will describe PACKET_MMAP settings and its constraints,
 also the mapping of the circular buffer in the user process and 
 the use of this buffer.
 
@@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ TP_STATUS_LOSING      : indicates there were packet drops from last time
                         the PACKET_STATISTICS option.
 
 TP_STATUS_CSUMNOTREADY: currently it's used for outgoing IP packets which 
-                        it's checksum will be done in hardware. So while 
+                        its checksum will be done in hardware. So while
                         reading the packet we should not try to check the 
                         checksum. 
 

Documentation/networking/x25-iface.txt

@@ -20,23 +20,23 @@ the rest of the skbuff, if any more information does exist.
 Packet Layer to Device Driver
 -----------------------------
 
-First Byte = 0x00
+First Byte = 0x00 (X25_IFACE_DATA)
 
 This indicates that the rest of the skbuff contains data to be transmitted
 over the LAPB link. The LAPB link should already exist before any data is
 passed down.
 
-First Byte = 0x01
+First Byte = 0x01 (X25_IFACE_CONNECT)
 
 Establish the LAPB link. If the link is already established then the connect
 confirmation message should be returned as soon as possible.
 
-First Byte = 0x02
+First Byte = 0x02 (X25_IFACE_DISCONNECT)
 
 Terminate the LAPB link. If it is already disconnected then the disconnect
 confirmation message should be returned as soon as possible.
 
-First Byte = 0x03
+First Byte = 0x03 (X25_IFACE_PARAMS)
 
 LAPB parameters. To be defined.
 
@@ -44,22 +44,22 @@ LAPB parameters. To be defined.
 Device Driver to Packet Layer
 -----------------------------
 
-First Byte = 0x00
+First Byte = 0x00 (X25_IFACE_DATA)
 
 This indicates that the rest of the skbuff contains data that has been
 received over the LAPB link.
 
-First Byte = 0x01
+First Byte = 0x01 (X25_IFACE_CONNECT)
 
 LAPB link has been established. The same message is used for both a LAPB
 link connect_confirmation and a connect_indication.
 
-First Byte = 0x02
+First Byte = 0x02 (X25_IFACE_DISCONNECT)
 
 LAPB link has been terminated. This same message is used for both a LAPB
 link disconnect_confirmation and a disconnect_indication.
 
-First Byte = 0x03
+First Byte = 0x03 (X25_IFACE_PARAMS)
 
 LAPB parameters. To be defined.
 

Documentation/oops-tracing.txt

@@ -256,9 +256,13 @@ characters, each representing a particular tainted value.
   9: 'A' if the ACPI table has been overridden.
 
  10: 'W' if a warning has previously been issued by the kernel.
+     (Though some warnings may set more specific taint flags.)
 
  11: 'C' if a staging driver has been loaded.
 
+ 12: 'I' if the kernel is working around a severe bug in the platform
+     firmware (BIOS or similar).
+
 The primary reason for the 'Tainted: ' string is to tell kernel
 debuggers if this is a clean kernel or if anything unusual has
 occurred.  Tainting is permanent: even if an offending module is

Documentation/padata.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+The padata parallel execution mechanism
+Last updated for 2.6.34
+
+Padata is a mechanism by which the kernel can farm work out to be done in
+parallel on multiple CPUs while retaining the ordering of tasks.  It was
+developed for use with the IPsec code, which needs to be able to perform
+encryption and decryption on large numbers of packets without reordering
+those packets.  The crypto developers made a point of writing padata in a
+sufficiently general fashion that it could be put to other uses as well.
+
+The first step in using padata is to set up a padata_instance structure for
+overall control of how tasks are to be run:
+
+    #include <linux/padata.h>
+
+    struct padata_instance *padata_alloc(const struct cpumask *cpumask,
+				         struct workqueue_struct *wq);
+
+The cpumask describes which processors will be used to execute work
+submitted to this instance.  The workqueue wq is where the work will
+actually be done; it should be a multithreaded queue, naturally.
+
+There are functions for enabling and disabling the instance:
+
+    void padata_start(struct padata_instance *pinst);
+    void padata_stop(struct padata_instance *pinst);
+
+These functions literally do nothing beyond setting or clearing the
+"padata_start() was called" flag; if that flag is not set, other functions
+will refuse to work.
+
+The list of CPUs to be used can be adjusted with these functions:
+
+    int padata_set_cpumask(struct padata_instance *pinst,
+			   cpumask_var_t cpumask);
+    int padata_add_cpu(struct padata_instance *pinst, int cpu);
+    int padata_remove_cpu(struct padata_instance *pinst, int cpu);
+
+Changing the CPU mask has the look of an expensive operation, though, so it
+probably should not be done with great frequency.
+
+Actually submitting work to the padata instance requires the creation of a
+padata_priv structure:
+
+    struct padata_priv {
+        /* Other stuff here... */
+	void                    (*parallel)(struct padata_priv *padata);
+	void                    (*serial)(struct padata_priv *padata);
+    };
+
+This structure will almost certainly be embedded within some larger
+structure specific to the work to be done.  Most its fields are private to
+padata, but the structure should be zeroed at initialization time, and the
+parallel() and serial() functions should be provided.  Those functions will
+be called in the process of getting the work done as we will see
+momentarily.
+
+The submission of work is done with:
+
+    int padata_do_parallel(struct padata_instance *pinst,
+		           struct padata_priv *padata, int cb_cpu);
+
+The pinst and padata structures must be set up as described above; cb_cpu
+specifies which CPU will be used for the final callback when the work is
+done; it must be in the current instance's CPU mask.  The return value from
+padata_do_parallel() is a little strange; zero is an error return
+indicating that the caller forgot the padata_start() formalities.  -EBUSY
+means that somebody, somewhere else is messing with the instance's CPU
+mask, while -EINVAL is a complaint about cb_cpu not being in that CPU mask.
+If all goes well, this function will return -EINPROGRESS, indicating that
+the work is in progress.
+
+Each task submitted to padata_do_parallel() will, in turn, be passed to
+exactly one call to the above-mentioned parallel() function, on one CPU, so
+true parallelism is achieved by submitting multiple tasks.  Despite the
+fact that the workqueue is used to make these calls, parallel() is run with
+software interrupts disabled and thus cannot sleep.  The parallel()
+function gets the padata_priv structure pointer as its lone parameter;
+information about the actual work to be done is probably obtained by using
+container_of() to find the enclosing structure.
+
+Note that parallel() has no return value; the padata subsystem assumes that
+parallel() will take responsibility for the task from this point.  The work
+need not be completed during this call, but, if parallel() leaves work
+outstanding, it should be prepared to be called again with a new job before
+the previous one completes.  When a task does complete, parallel() (or
+whatever function actually finishes the job) should inform padata of the
+fact with a call to:
+
+    void padata_do_serial(struct padata_priv *padata);
+
+At some point in the future, padata_do_serial() will trigger a call to the
+serial() function in the padata_priv structure.  That call will happen on
+the CPU requested in the initial call to padata_do_parallel(); it, too, is
+done through the workqueue, but with local software interrupts disabled.
+Note that this call may be deferred for a while since the padata code takes
+pains to ensure that tasks are completed in the order in which they were
+submitted.
+
+The one remaining function in the padata API should be called to clean up
+when a padata instance is no longer needed:
+
+    void padata_free(struct padata_instance *pinst);
+
+This function will busy-wait while any remaining tasks are completed, so it
+might be best not to call it while there is work outstanding.  Shutting
+down the workqueue, if necessary, should be done separately.

Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,17 @@
 This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors:
+* No dev_node_t (as of 2.6.35)
+   There is no more need to fill out a "dev_node_t" structure.
+
+* New IRQ request rules (as of 2.6.35)
+   Instead of the old pcmcia_request_irq() interface, drivers may now
+   choose between:
+   - calling request_irq/free_irq directly. Use the IRQ from *p_dev->irq.
+   - use pcmcia_request_irq(p_dev, handler_t); the PCMCIA core will
+     clean up automatically on calls to pcmcia_disable_device() or
+     device ejection.
+   - drivers still not capable of IRQF_SHARED (or not telling us so) may
+     use the deprecated pcmcia_request_exclusive_irq() for the time
+     being; they might receive a shared IRQ nonetheless.
 
 * no cs_error / CS_CHECK / CONFIG_PCMCIA_DEBUG (as of 2.6.33)
    Instead of the cs_error() callback or the CS_CHECK() macro, please use

Documentation/power/devices.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,13 @@
+Device Power Management
+
+Copyright (c) 2010 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc.
+Copyright (c) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
+
+
 Most of the code in Linux is device drivers, so most of the Linux power
-management code is also driver-specific.  Most drivers will do very little;
-others, especially for platforms with small batteries (like cell phones),
-will do a lot.
+management (PM) code is also driver-specific.  Most drivers will do very
+little; others, especially for platforms with small batteries (like cell
+phones), will do a lot.
 
 This writeup gives an overview of how drivers interact with system-wide
 power management goals, emphasizing the models and interfaces that are
@@ -15,9 +21,10 @@ Drivers will use one or both of these models to put devices into low-power
 states:
 
     System Sleep model:
-	Drivers can enter low power states as part of entering system-wide
-	low-power states like "suspend-to-ram", or (mostly for systems with
-	disks) "hibernate" (suspend-to-disk).
+	Drivers can enter low-power states as part of entering system-wide
+	low-power states like "suspend" (also known as "suspend-to-RAM"), or
+	(mostly for systems with disks) "hibernation" (also known as
+	"suspend-to-disk").
 
 	This is something that device, bus, and class drivers collaborate on
 	by implementing various role-specific suspend and resume methods to
@@ -25,33 +32,41 @@ states:
 	them without loss of data.
 
 	Some drivers can manage hardware wakeup events, which make the system
-	leave that low-power state.  This feature may be disabled using the
-	relevant /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup file; enabling it may cost some
-	power usage, but let the whole system enter low power states more often.
+	leave the low-power state.  This feature may be enabled or disabled
+	using the relevant /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup file (for Ethernet
+	drivers the ioctl interface used by ethtool may also be used for this
+	purpose); enabling it may cost some power usage, but let the whole
+	system enter low-power states more often.
 
     Runtime Power Management model:
-	Drivers may also enter low power states while the system is running,
-	independently of other power management activity.  Upstream drivers
-	will normally not know (or care) if the device is in some low power
-	state when issuing requests; the driver will auto-resume anything
-	that's needed when it gets a request.
-
-	This doesn't have, or need much infrastructure; it's just something you
-	should do when writing your drivers.  For example, clk_disable() unused
-	clocks as part of minimizing power drain for currently-unused hardware.
-	Of course, sometimes clusters of drivers will collaborate with each
-	other, which could involve task-specific power management.
-
-There's not a lot to be said about those low power states except that they
-are very system-specific, and often device-specific.  Also, that if enough
-drivers put themselves into low power states (at "runtime"), the effect may be
-the same as entering some system-wide low-power state (system sleep) ... and
-that synergies exist, so that several drivers using runtime pm might put the
-system into a state where even deeper power saving options are available.
-
-Most suspended devices will have quiesced all I/O:  no more DMA or irqs, no
-more data read or written, and requests from upstream drivers are no longer
-accepted.  A given bus or platform may have different requirements though.
+	Devices may also be put into low-power states while the system is
+	running, independently of other power management activity in principle.
+	However, devices are not generally independent of each other (for
+	example, a parent device cannot be suspended unless all of its child
+	devices have been suspended).  Moreover, depending on the bus type the
+	device is on, it may be necessary to carry out some bus-specific
+	operations on the device for this purpose.  Devices put into low power
+	states at run time may require special handling during system-wide power
+	transitions (suspend or hibernation).
+
+	For these reasons not only the device driver itself, but also the
+	appropriate subsystem (bus type, device type or device class) driver and
+	the PM core are involved in runtime power management.  As in the system
+	sleep power management case, they need to collaborate by implementing
+	various role-specific suspend and resume methods, so that the hardware
+	is cleanly powered down and reactivated without data or service loss.
+
+There's not a lot to be said about those low-power states except that they are
+very system-specific, and often device-specific.  Also, that if enough devices
+have been put into low-power states (at runtime), the effect may be very similar
+to entering some system-wide low-power state (system sleep) ... and that
+synergies exist, so that several drivers using runtime PM might put the system
+into a state where even deeper power saving options are available.
+
+Most suspended devices will have quiesced all I/O: no more DMA or IRQs (except
+for wakeup events), no more data read or written, and requests from upstream
+drivers are no longer accepted.  A given bus or platform may have different
+requirements though.
 
 Examples of hardware wakeup events include an alarm from a real time clock,
 network wake-on-LAN packets, keyboard or mouse activity, and media insertion
@@ -60,129 +75,152 @@ or removal (for PCMCIA, MMC/SD, USB, and so on).
 
 Interfaces for Entering System Sleep States
 ===========================================
-Most of the programming interfaces a device driver needs to know about
-relate to that first model:  entering a system-wide low power state,
-rather than just minimizing power consumption by one device.
-
-
-Bus Driver Methods
-------------------
-The core methods to suspend and resume devices reside in struct bus_type.
-These are mostly of interest to people writing infrastructure for busses
-like PCI or USB, or because they define the primitives that device drivers
-may need to apply in domain-specific ways to their devices:
-
-struct bus_type {
-	...
-	int  (*suspend)(struct device *dev, pm_message_t state);
-	int  (*resume)(struct device *dev);
+There are programming interfaces provided for subsystems (bus type, device type,
+device class) and device drivers to allow them to participate in the power
+management of devices they are concerned with.  These interfaces cover both
+system sleep and runtime power management.
+
+
+Device Power Management Operations
+----------------------------------
+Device power management operations, at the subsystem level as well as at the
+device driver level, are implemented by defining and populating objects of type
+struct dev_pm_ops:
+
+struct dev_pm_ops {
+	int (*prepare)(struct device *dev);
+	void (*complete)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*suspend)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*resume)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*freeze)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*thaw)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*poweroff)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*restore)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*suspend_noirq)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*resume_noirq)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*freeze_noirq)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*thaw_noirq)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*poweroff_noirq)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*restore_noirq)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*runtime_suspend)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*runtime_resume)(struct device *dev);
+	int (*runtime_idle)(struct device *dev);
 };
 
-Bus drivers implement those methods as appropriate for the hardware and
-the drivers using it; PCI works differently from USB, and so on.  Not many
-people write bus drivers; most driver code is a "device driver" that
-builds on top of bus-specific framework code.
+This structure is defined in include/linux/pm.h and the methods included in it
+are also described in that file.  Their roles will be explained in what follows.
+For now, it should be sufficient to remember that the last three methods are
+specific to runtime power management while the remaining ones are used during
+system-wide power transitions.
 
-For more information on these driver calls, see the description later;
-they are called in phases for every device, respecting the parent-child
-sequencing in the driver model tree.  Note that as this is being written,
-only the suspend() and resume() are widely available; not many bus drivers
-leverage all of those phases, or pass them down to lower driver levels.
+There also is a deprecated "old" or "legacy" interface for power management
+operations available at least for some subsystems.  This approach does not use
+struct dev_pm_ops objects and it is suitable only for implementing system sleep
+power management methods.  Therefore it is not described in this document, so
+please refer directly to the source code for more information about it.
 
 
-/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup files
------------------------------------
-All devices in the driver model have two flags to control handling of
-wakeup events, which are hardware signals that can force the device and/or
-system out of a low power state.  These are initialized by bus or device
-driver code using device_init_wakeup(dev,can_wakeup).
+Subsystem-Level Methods
+-----------------------
+The core methods to suspend and resume devices reside in struct dev_pm_ops
+pointed to by the pm member of struct bus_type, struct device_type and
+struct class.  They are mostly of interest to the people writing infrastructure
+for buses, like PCI or USB, or device type and device class drivers.
 
-The "can_wakeup" flag just records whether the device (and its driver) can
-physically support wakeup events.  When that flag is clear, the sysfs
-"wakeup" file is empty, and device_may_wakeup() returns false.
+Bus drivers implement these methods as appropriate for the hardware and the
+drivers using it; PCI works differently from USB, and so on.  Not many people
+write subsystem-level drivers; most driver code is a "device driver" that builds
+on top of bus-specific framework code.
 
-For devices that can issue wakeup events, a separate flag controls whether
-that device should try to use its wakeup mechanism.  The initial value of
-device_may_wakeup() will be true, so that the device's "wakeup" file holds
-the value "enabled".  Userspace can change that to "disabled" so that
-device_may_wakeup() returns false; or change it back to "enabled" (so that
-it returns true again).
+For more information on these driver calls, see the description later;
+they are called in phases for every device, respecting the parent-child
+sequencing in the driver model tree.
 
 
-EXAMPLE:  PCI Device Driver Methods
+/sys/devices/.../power/wakeup files
 -----------------------------------
-PCI framework software calls these methods when the PCI device driver bound
-to a device device has provided them:
-
-struct pci_driver {
-	...
-	int  (*suspend)(struct pci_device *pdev, pm_message_t state);
-	int  (*suspend_late)(struct pci_device *pdev, pm_message_t state);
+All devices in the driver model have two flags to control handling of wakeup
+events (hardware signals that can force the device and/or system out of a low
+power state).  These flags are initialized by bus or device driver code using
+device_set_wakeup_capable() and device_set_wakeup_enable(), defined in
+include/linux/pm_wakeup.h.
 
-	int  (*resume_early)(struct pci_device *pdev);
-	int  (*resume)(struct pci_device *pdev);
-};
-
-Drivers will implement those methods, and call PCI-specific procedures
-like pci_set_power_state(), pci_enable_wake(), pci_save_state(), and
-pci_restore_state() to manage PCI-specific mechanisms.  (PCI config space
-could be saved during driver probe, if it weren't for the fact that some
-systems rely on userspace tweaking using setpci.)  Devices are suspended
-before their bridges enter low power states, and likewise bridges resume
-before their devices.
-
-
-Upper Layers of Driver Stacks
------------------------------
-Device drivers generally have at least two interfaces, and the methods
-sketched above are the ones which apply to the lower level (nearer PCI, USB,
-or other bus hardware).  The network and block layers are examples of upper
-level interfaces, as is a character device talking to userspace.
-
-Power management requests normally need to flow through those upper levels,
-which often use domain-oriented requests like "blank that screen".  In
-some cases those upper levels will have power management intelligence that
-relates to end-user activity, or other devices that work in cooperation.
-
-When those interfaces are structured using class interfaces, there is a
-standard way to have the upper layer stop issuing requests to a given
-class device (and restart later):
-
-struct class {
-	...
-	int  (*suspend)(struct device *dev, pm_message_t state);
-	int  (*resume)(struct device *dev);
-};
-
-Those calls are issued in specific phases of the process by which the
-system enters a low power "suspend" state, or resumes from it.
-
-
-Calling Drivers to Enter System Sleep States
-============================================
-When the system enters a low power state, each device's driver is asked
-to suspend the device by putting it into state compatible with the target
+The "can_wakeup" flag just records whether the device (and its driver) can
+physically support wakeup events.  The device_set_wakeup_capable() routine
+affects this flag.  The "should_wakeup" flag controls whether the device should
+try to use its wakeup mechanism.  device_set_wakeup_enable() affects this flag;
+for the most part drivers should not change its value.  The initial value of
+should_wakeup is supposed to be false for the majority of devices; the major
+exceptions are power buttons, keyboards, and Ethernet adapters whose WoL
+(wake-on-LAN) feature has been set up with ethtool.
+
+Whether or not a device is capable of issuing wakeup events is a hardware
+matter, and the kernel is responsible for keeping track of it.  By contrast,
+whether or not a wakeup-capable device should issue wakeup events is a policy
+decision, and it is managed by user space through a sysfs attribute: the
+power/wakeup file.  User space can write the strings "enabled" or "disabled" to
+set or clear the should_wakeup flag, respectively.  Reads from the file will
+return the corresponding string if can_wakeup is true, but if can_wakeup is
+false then reads will return an empty string, to indicate that the device
+doesn't support wakeup events.  (But even though the file appears empty, writes
+will still affect the should_wakeup flag.)
+
+The device_may_wakeup() routine returns true only if both flags are set.
+Drivers should check this routine when putting devices in a low-power state
+during a system sleep transition, to see whether or not to enable the devices'
+wakeup mechanisms.  However for runtime power management, wakeup events should
+be enabled whenever the device and driver both support them, regardless of the
+should_wakeup flag.
+
+
+/sys/devices/.../power/control files
+------------------------------------
+Each device in the driver model has a flag to control whether it is subject to
+runtime power management.  This flag, called runtime_auto, is initialized by the
+bus type (or generally subsystem) code using pm_runtime_allow() or
+pm_runtime_forbid(); the default is to allow runtime power management.
+
+The setting can be adjusted by user space by writing either "on" or "auto" to
+the device's power/control sysfs file.  Writing "auto" calls pm_runtime_allow(),
+setting the flag and allowing the device to be runtime power-managed by its
+driver.  Writing "on" calls pm_runtime_forbid(), clearing the flag, returning
+the device to full power if it was in a low-power state, and preventing the
+device from being runtime power-managed.  User space can check the current value
+of the runtime_auto flag by reading the file.
+
+The device's runtime_auto flag has no effect on the handling of system-wide
+power transitions.  In particular, the device can (and in the majority of cases
+should and will) be put into a low-power state during a system-wide transition
+to a sleep state even though its runtime_auto flag is clear.
+
+For more information about the runtime power management framework, refer to
+Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.
+
+
+Calling Drivers to Enter and Leave System Sleep States
+======================================================
+When the system goes into a sleep state, each device's driver is asked to
+suspend the device by putting it into a state compatible with the target
 system state.  That's usually some version of "off", but the details are
 system-specific.  Also, wakeup-enabled devices will usually stay partly
 functional in order to wake the system.
 
-When the system leaves that low power state, the device's driver is asked
-to resume it.  The suspend and resume operations always go together, and
-both are multi-phase operations.
+When the system leaves that low-power state, the device's driver is asked to
+resume it by returning it to full power.  The suspend and resume operations
+always go together, and both are multi-phase operations.
 
-For simple drivers, suspend might quiesce the device using the class code
-and then turn its hardware as "off" as possible with late_suspend.  The
+For simple drivers, suspend might quiesce the device using class code
+and then turn its hardware as "off" as possible during suspend_noirq.  The
 matching resume calls would then completely reinitialize the hardware
 before reactivating its class I/O queues.
 
-More power-aware drivers drivers will use more than one device low power
-state, either at runtime or during system sleep states, and might trigger
-system wakeup events.
+More power-aware drivers might prepare the devices for triggering system wakeup
+events.
 
 
 Call Sequence Guarantees
 ------------------------
-To ensure that bridges and similar links needed to talk to a device are
+To ensure that bridges and similar links needing to talk to a device are
 available when the device is suspended or resumed, the device tree is
 walked in a bottom-up order to suspend devices.  A top-down order is
 used to resume those devices.
@@ -194,67 +232,310 @@ its parent; and can't be removed or suspended after that parent.
 The policy is that the device tree should match hardware bus topology.
 (Or at least the control bus, for devices which use multiple busses.)
 In particular, this means that a device registration may fail if the parent of
-the device is suspending (ie. has been chosen by the PM core as the next
+the device is suspending (i.e. has been chosen by the PM core as the next
 device to suspend) or has already suspended, as well as after all of the other
 devices have been suspended.  Device drivers must be prepared to cope with such
 situations.
 
 
-Suspending Devices
-------------------
-Suspending a given device is done in several phases.  Suspending the
-system always includes every phase, executing calls for every device
-before the next phase begins.  Not all busses or classes support all
-these callbacks; and not all drivers use all the callbacks.
+System Power Management Phases
+------------------------------
+Suspending or resuming the system is done in several phases.  Different phases
+are used for standby or memory sleep states ("suspend-to-RAM") and the
+hibernation state ("suspend-to-disk").  Each phase involves executing callbacks
+for every device before the next phase begins.  Not all busses or classes
+support all these callbacks and not all drivers use all the callbacks.  The
+various phases always run after tasks have been frozen and before they are
+unfrozen.  Furthermore, the *_noirq phases run at a time when IRQ handlers have
+been disabled (except for those marked with the IRQ_WAKEUP flag).
 
-The phases are seen by driver notifications issued in this order:
+Most phases use bus, type, and class callbacks (that is, methods defined in
+dev->bus->pm, dev->type->pm, and dev->class->pm).  The prepare and complete
+phases are exceptions; they use only bus callbacks.  When multiple callbacks
+are used in a phase, they are invoked in the order: <class, type, bus> during
+power-down transitions and in the opposite order during power-up transitions.
+For example, during the suspend phase the PM core invokes
 
-   1	class.suspend(dev, message) is called after tasks are frozen, for
-	devices associated with a class that has such a method.  This
-	method may sleep.
+	dev->class->pm.suspend(dev);
+	dev->type->pm.suspend(dev);
+	dev->bus->pm.suspend(dev);
 
-	Since I/O activity usually comes from such higher layers, this is
-	a good place to quiesce all drivers of a given type (and keep such
-	code out of those drivers).
+before moving on to the next device, whereas during the resume phase the core
+invokes
 
-   2	bus.suspend(dev, message) is called next.  This method may sleep,
-	and is often morphed into a device driver call with bus-specific
-	parameters and/or rules.
+	dev->bus->pm.resume(dev);
+	dev->type->pm.resume(dev);
+	dev->class->pm.resume(dev);
 
-	This call should handle parts of device suspend logic that require
-	sleeping.  It probably does work to quiesce the device which hasn't
-	been abstracted into class.suspend().
+These callbacks may in turn invoke device- or driver-specific methods stored in
+dev->driver->pm, but they don't have to.
 
-The pm_message_t parameter is currently used to refine those semantics
-(described later).
 
-At the end of those phases, drivers should normally have stopped all I/O
-transactions (DMA, IRQs), saved enough state that they can re-initialize
-or restore previous state (as needed by the hardware), and placed the
-device into a low-power state.  On many platforms they will also use
-clk_disable() to gate off one or more clock sources; sometimes they will
-also switch off power supplies, or reduce voltages.  Drivers which have
-runtime PM support may already have performed some or all of the steps
-needed to prepare for the upcoming system sleep state.
+Entering System Suspend
+-----------------------
+When the system goes into the standby or memory sleep state, the phases are:
+
+		prepare, suspend, suspend_noirq.
+
+    1.	The prepare phase is meant to prevent races by preventing new devices
+	from being registered; the PM core would never know that all the
+	children of a device had been suspended if new children could be
+	registered at will.  (By contrast, devices may be unregistered at any
+	time.)  Unlike the other suspend-related phases, during the prepare
+	phase the device tree is traversed top-down.
+
+	The prepare phase uses only a bus callback.  After the callback method
+	returns, no new children may be registered below the device.  The method
+	may also prepare the device or driver in some way for the upcoming
+	system power transition, but it should not put the device into a
+	low-power state.
+
+    2.	The suspend methods should quiesce the device to stop it from performing
+	I/O.  They also may save the device registers and put it into the
+	appropriate low-power state, depending on the bus type the device is on,
+	and they may enable wakeup events.
+
+    3.	The suspend_noirq phase occurs after IRQ handlers have been disabled,
+	which means that the driver's interrupt handler will not be called while
+	the callback method is running.  The methods should save the values of
+	the device's registers that weren't saved previously and finally put the
+	device into the appropriate low-power state.
+
+	The majority of subsystems and device drivers need not implement this
+	callback.  However, bus types allowing devices to share interrupt
+	vectors, like PCI, generally need it; otherwise a driver might encounter
+	an error during the suspend phase by fielding a shared interrupt
+	generated by some other device after its own device had been set to low
+	power.
+
+At the end of these phases, drivers should have stopped all I/O transactions
+(DMA, IRQs), saved enough state that they can re-initialize or restore previous
+state (as needed by the hardware), and placed the device into a low-power state.
+On many platforms they will gate off one or more clock sources; sometimes they
+will also switch off power supplies or reduce voltages.  (Drivers supporting
+runtime PM may already have performed some or all of these steps.)
+
+If device_may_wakeup(dev) returns true, the device should be prepared for
+generating hardware wakeup signals to trigger a system wakeup event when the
+system is in the sleep state.  For example, enable_irq_wake() might identify
+GPIO signals hooked up to a switch or other external hardware, and
+pci_enable_wake() does something similar for the PCI PME signal.
+
+If any of these callbacks returns an error, the system won't enter the desired
+low-power state.  Instead the PM core will unwind its actions by resuming all
+the devices that were suspended.
+
+
+Leaving System Suspend
+----------------------
+When resuming from standby or memory sleep, the phases are:
+
+		resume_noirq, resume, complete.
+
+    1.	The resume_noirq callback methods should perform any actions needed
+	before the driver's interrupt handlers are invoked.  This generally
+	means undoing the actions of the suspend_noirq phase.  If the bus type
+	permits devices to share interrupt vectors, like PCI, the method should
+	bring the device and its driver into a state in which the driver can
+	recognize if the device is the source of incoming interrupts, if any,
+	and handle them correctly.
+
+	For example, the PCI bus type's ->pm.resume_noirq() puts the device into
+	the full-power state (D0 in the PCI terminology) and restores the
+	standard configuration registers of the device.  Then it calls the
+	device driver's ->pm.resume_noirq() method to perform device-specific
+	actions.
+
+    2.	The resume methods should bring the the device back to its operating
+	state, so that it can perform normal I/O.  This generally involves
+	undoing the actions of the suspend phase.
+
+    3.	The complete phase uses only a bus callback.  The method should undo the
+	actions of the prepare phase.  Note, however, that new children may be
+	registered below the device as soon as the resume callbacks occur; it's
+	not necessary to wait until the complete phase.
+
+At the end of these phases, drivers should be as functional as they were before
+suspending: I/O can be performed using DMA and IRQs, and the relevant clocks are
+gated on.  Even if the device was in a low-power state before the system sleep
+because of runtime power management, afterwards it should be back in its
+full-power state.  There are multiple reasons why it's best to do this; they are
+discussed in more detail in Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.
 
-When any driver sees that its device_can_wakeup(dev), it should make sure
-to use the relevant hardware signals to trigger a system wakeup event.
-For example, enable_irq_wake() might identify GPIO signals hooked up to
-a switch or other external hardware, and pci_enable_wake() does something
-similar for PCI's PME# signal.
+However, the details here may again be platform-specific.  For example,
+some systems support multiple "run" states, and the mode in effect at
+the end of resume might not be the one which preceded suspension.
+That means availability of certain clocks or power supplies changed,
+which could easily affect how a driver works.
+
+Drivers need to be able to handle hardware which has been reset since the
+suspend methods were called, for example by complete reinitialization.
+This may be the hardest part, and the one most protected by NDA'd documents
+and chip errata.  It's simplest if the hardware state hasn't changed since
+the suspend was carried out, but that can't be guaranteed (in fact, it ususally
+is not the case).
+
+Drivers must also be prepared to notice that the device has been removed
+while the system was powered down, whenever that's physically possible.
+PCMCIA, MMC, USB, Firewire, SCSI, and even IDE are common examples of busses
+where common Linux platforms will see such removal.  Details of how drivers
+will notice and handle such removals are currently bus-specific, and often
+involve a separate thread.
+
+These callbacks may return an error value, but the PM core will ignore such
+errors since there's nothing it can do about them other than printing them in
+the system log.
+
+
+Entering Hibernation
+--------------------
+Hibernating the system is more complicated than putting it into the standby or
+memory sleep state, because it involves creating and saving a system image.
+Therefore there are more phases for hibernation, with a different set of
+callbacks.  These phases always run after tasks have been frozen and memory has
+been freed.
+
+The general procedure for hibernation is to quiesce all devices (freeze), create
+an image of the system memory while everything is stable, reactivate all
+devices (thaw), write the image to permanent storage, and finally shut down the
+system (poweroff).  The phases used to accomplish this are:
+
+	prepare, freeze, freeze_noirq, thaw_noirq, thaw, complete,
+	prepare, poweroff, poweroff_noirq
+
+    1.	The prepare phase is discussed in the "Entering System Suspend" section
+	above.
+
+    2.	The freeze methods should quiesce the device so that it doesn't generate
+	IRQs or DMA, and they may need to save the values of device registers.
+	However the device does not have to be put in a low-power state, and to
+	save time it's best not to do so.  Also, the device should not be
+	prepared to generate wakeup events.
+
+    3.	The freeze_noirq phase is analogous to the suspend_noirq phase discussed
+	above, except again that the device should not be put in a low-power
+	state and should not be allowed to generate wakeup events.
+
+At this point the system image is created.  All devices should be inactive and
+the contents of memory should remain undisturbed while this happens, so that the
+image forms an atomic snapshot of the system state.
+
+    4.	The thaw_noirq phase is analogous to the resume_noirq phase discussed
+	above.  The main difference is that its methods can assume the device is
+	in the same state as at the end of the freeze_noirq phase.
+
+    5.	The thaw phase is analogous to the resume phase discussed above.  Its
+	methods should bring the device back to an operating state, so that it
+	can be used for saving the image if necessary.
+
+    6.	The complete phase is discussed in the "Leaving System Suspend" section
+	above.
+
+At this point the system image is saved, and the devices then need to be
+prepared for the upcoming system shutdown.  This is much like suspending them
+before putting the system into the standby or memory sleep state, and the phases
+are similar.
+
+    7.	The prepare phase is discussed above.
+
+    8.	The poweroff phase is analogous to the suspend phase.
+
+    9.	The poweroff_noirq phase is analogous to the suspend_noirq phase.
+
+The poweroff and poweroff_noirq callbacks should do essentially the same things
+as the suspend and suspend_noirq callbacks.  The only notable difference is that
+they need not store the device register values, because the registers should
+already have been stored during the freeze or freeze_noirq phases.
+
+
+Leaving Hibernation
+-------------------
+Resuming from hibernation is, again, more complicated than resuming from a sleep
+state in which the contents of main memory are preserved, because it requires
+a system image to be loaded into memory and the pre-hibernation memory contents
+to be restored before control can be passed back to the image kernel.
+
+Although in principle, the image might be loaded into memory and the
+pre-hibernation memory contents restored by the boot loader, in practice this
+can't be done because boot loaders aren't smart enough and there is no
+established protocol for passing the necessary information.  So instead, the
+boot loader loads a fresh instance of the kernel, called the boot kernel, into
+memory and passes control to it in the usual way.  Then the boot kernel reads
+the system image, restores the pre-hibernation memory contents, and passes
+control to the image kernel.  Thus two different kernels are involved in
+resuming from hibernation.  In fact, the boot kernel may be completely different
+from the image kernel: a different configuration and even a different version.
+This has important consequences for device drivers and their subsystems.
+
+To be able to load the system image into memory, the boot kernel needs to
+include at least a subset of device drivers allowing it to access the storage
+medium containing the image, although it doesn't need to include all of the
+drivers present in the image kernel.  After the image has been loaded, the
+devices managed by the boot kernel need to be prepared for passing control back
+to the image kernel.  This is very similar to the initial steps involved in
+creating a system image, and it is accomplished in the same way, using prepare,
+freeze, and freeze_noirq phases.  However the devices affected by these phases
+are only those having drivers in the boot kernel; other devices will still be in
+whatever state the boot loader left them.
+
+Should the restoration of the pre-hibernation memory contents fail, the boot
+kernel would go through the "thawing" procedure described above, using the
+thaw_noirq, thaw, and complete phases, and then continue running normally.  This
+happens only rarely.  Most often the pre-hibernation memory contents are
+restored successfully and control is passed to the image kernel, which then
+becomes responsible for bringing the system back to the working state.
+
+To achieve this, the image kernel must restore the devices' pre-hibernation
+functionality.  The operation is much like waking up from the memory sleep
+state, although it involves different phases:
+
+	restore_noirq, restore, complete
+
+    1.	The restore_noirq phase is analogous to the resume_noirq phase.
+
+    2.	The restore phase is analogous to the resume phase.
+
+    3.	The complete phase is discussed above.
+
+The main difference from resume[_noirq] is that restore[_noirq] must assume the
+device has been accessed and reconfigured by the boot loader or the boot kernel.
+Consequently the state of the device may be different from the state remembered
+from the freeze and freeze_noirq phases.  The device may even need to be reset
+and completely re-initialized.  In many cases this difference doesn't matter, so
+the resume[_noirq] and restore[_norq] method pointers can be set to the same
+routines.  Nevertheless, different callback pointers are used in case there is a
+situation where it actually matters.
 
-If a driver (or bus, or class) fails it suspend method, the system won't
-enter the desired low power state; it will resume all the devices it's
-suspended so far.
 
-Note that drivers may need to perform different actions based on the target
-system lowpower/sleep state.  At this writing, there are only platform
-specific APIs through which drivers could determine those target states.
+System Devices
+--------------
+System devices (sysdevs) follow a slightly different API, which can be found in
+
+	include/linux/sysdev.h
+	drivers/base/sys.c
+
+System devices will be suspended with interrupts disabled, and after all other
+devices have been suspended.  On resume, they will be resumed before any other
+devices, and also with interrupts disabled.  These things occur in special
+"sysdev_driver" phases, which affect only system devices.
+
+Thus, after the suspend_noirq (or freeze_noirq or poweroff_noirq) phase, when
+the non-boot CPUs are all offline and IRQs are disabled on the remaining online
+CPU, then a sysdev_driver.suspend phase is carried out, and the system enters a
+sleep state (or a system image is created).  During resume (or after the image
+has been created or loaded) a sysdev_driver.resume phase is carried out, IRQs
+are enabled on the only online CPU, the non-boot CPUs are enabled, and the
+resume_noirq (or thaw_noirq or restore_noirq) phase begins.
+
+Code to actually enter and exit the system-wide low power state sometimes
+involves hardware details that are only known to the boot firmware, and
+may leave a CPU running software (from SRAM or flash memory) that monitors
+the system and manages its wakeup sequence.
 
 
 Device Low Power (suspend) States
 ---------------------------------
-Device low-power states aren't very standard.  One device might only handle
+Device low-power states aren't standard.  One device might only handle
 "on" and "off, while another might support a dozen different versions of
 "on" (how many engines are active?), plus a state that gets back to "on"
 faster than from a full "off".
@@ -265,7 +546,7 @@ PCI device may not perform DMA or issue IRQs, and any wakeup events it
 issues would be issued through the PME# bus signal.  Plus, there are
 several PCI-standard device states, some of which are optional.
 
-In contrast, integrated system-on-chip processors often use irqs as the
+In contrast, integrated system-on-chip processors often use IRQs as the
 wakeup event sources (so drivers would call enable_irq_wake) and might
 be able to treat DMA completion as a wakeup event (sometimes DMA can stay
 active too, it'd only be the CPU and some peripherals that sleep).
@@ -284,120 +565,17 @@ ways; the aforementioned LCD might be active in one product's "standby",
 but a different product using the same SOC might work differently.
 
 
-Meaning of pm_message_t.event
------------------------------
-Parameters to suspend calls include the device affected and a message of
-type pm_message_t, which has one field:  the event.  If driver does not
-recognize the event code, suspend calls may abort the request and return
-a negative errno.  However, most drivers will be fine if they implement
-PM_EVENT_SUSPEND semantics for all messages.
+Power Management Notifiers
+--------------------------
+There are some operations that cannot be carried out by the power management
+callbacks discussed above, because the callbacks occur too late or too early.
+To handle these cases, subsystems and device drivers may register power
+management notifiers that are called before tasks are frozen and after they have
+been thawed.  Generally speaking, the PM notifiers are suitable for performing
+actions that either require user space to be available, or at least won't
+interfere with user space.
 
-The event codes are used to refine the goal of suspending the device, and
-mostly matter when creating or resuming system memory image snapshots, as
-used with suspend-to-disk:
-
-    PM_EVENT_SUSPEND -- quiesce the driver and put hardware into a low-power
-	state.  When used with system sleep states like "suspend-to-RAM" or
-	"standby", the upcoming resume() call will often be able to rely on
-	state kept in hardware, or issue system wakeup events.
-
-    PM_EVENT_HIBERNATE -- Put hardware into a low-power state and enable wakeup
-	events as appropriate.  It is only used with hibernation
-	(suspend-to-disk) and few devices are able to wake up the system from
-	this state; most are completely powered off.
-
-    PM_EVENT_FREEZE -- quiesce the driver, but don't necessarily change into
-	any low power mode.  A system snapshot is about to be taken, often
-	followed by a call to the driver's resume() method.  Neither wakeup
-	events nor DMA are allowed.
-
-    PM_EVENT_PRETHAW -- quiesce the driver, knowing that the upcoming resume()
-	will restore a suspend-to-disk snapshot from a different kernel image.
-	Drivers that are smart enough to look at their hardware state during
-	resume() processing need that state to be correct ... a PRETHAW could
-	be used to invalidate that state (by resetting the device), like a
-	shutdown() invocation would before a kexec() or system halt.  Other
-	drivers might handle this the same way as PM_EVENT_FREEZE.  Neither
-	wakeup events nor DMA are allowed.
-
-To enter "standby" (ACPI S1) or "Suspend to RAM" (STR, ACPI S3) states, or
-the similarly named APM states, only PM_EVENT_SUSPEND is used; the other event
-codes are used for hibernation ("Suspend to Disk", STD, ACPI S4).
-
-There's also PM_EVENT_ON, a value which never appears as a suspend event
-but is sometimes used to record the "not suspended" device state.
-
-
-Resuming Devices
-----------------
-Resuming is done in multiple phases, much like suspending, with all
-devices processing each phase's calls before the next phase begins.
-
-The phases are seen by driver notifications issued in this order:
-
-   1	bus.resume(dev) reverses the effects of bus.suspend().  This may
-	be morphed into a device driver call with bus-specific parameters;
-	implementations may sleep.
-
-   2	class.resume(dev) is called for devices associated with a class
-	that has such a method.  Implementations may sleep.
-
-	This reverses the effects of class.suspend(), and would usually
-	reactivate the device's I/O queue.
-
-At the end of those phases, drivers should normally be as functional as
-they were before suspending:  I/O can be performed using DMA and IRQs, and
-the relevant clocks are gated on.  The device need not be "fully on"; it
-might be in a runtime lowpower/suspend state that acts as if it were.
-
-However, the details here may again be platform-specific.  For example,
-some systems support multiple "run" states, and the mode in effect at
-the end of resume() might not be the one which preceded suspension.
-That means availability of certain clocks or power supplies changed,
-which could easily affect how a driver works.
-
-
-Drivers need to be able to handle hardware which has been reset since the
-suspend methods were called, for example by complete reinitialization.
-This may be the hardest part, and the one most protected by NDA'd documents
-and chip errata.  It's simplest if the hardware state hasn't changed since
-the suspend() was called, but that can't always be guaranteed.
-
-Drivers must also be prepared to notice that the device has been removed
-while the system was powered off, whenever that's physically possible.
-PCMCIA, MMC, USB, Firewire, SCSI, and even IDE are common examples of busses
-where common Linux platforms will see such removal.  Details of how drivers
-will notice and handle such removals are currently bus-specific, and often
-involve a separate thread.
-
-
-Note that the bus-specific runtime PM wakeup mechanism can exist, and might
-be defined to share some of the same driver code as for system wakeup.  For
-example, a bus-specific device driver's resume() method might be used there,
-so it wouldn't only be called from bus.resume() during system-wide wakeup.
-See bus-specific information about how runtime wakeup events are handled.
-
-
-System Devices
---------------
-System devices follow a slightly different API, which can be found in
-
-	include/linux/sysdev.h
-	drivers/base/sys.c
-
-System devices will only be suspended with interrupts disabled, and after
-all other devices have been suspended.  On resume, they will be resumed
-before any other devices, and also with interrupts disabled.
-
-That is, IRQs are disabled, the suspend_late() phase begins, then the
-sysdev_driver.suspend() phase, and the system enters a sleep state.  Then
-the sysdev_driver.resume() phase begins, followed by the resume_early()
-phase, after which IRQs are enabled.
-
-Code to actually enter and exit the system-wide low power state sometimes
-involves hardware details that are only known to the boot firmware, and
-may leave a CPU running software (from SRAM or flash memory) that monitors
-the system and manages its wakeup sequence.
+For details refer to Documentation/power/notifiers.txt.
 
 
 Runtime Power Management
@@ -407,82 +585,23 @@ running. This feature is useful for devices that are not being used, and
 can offer significant power savings on a running system.  These devices
 often support a range of runtime power states, which might use names such
 as "off", "sleep", "idle", "active", and so on.  Those states will in some
-cases (like PCI) be partially constrained by a bus the device uses, and will
+cases (like PCI) be partially constrained by the bus the device uses, and will
 usually include hardware states that are also used in system sleep states.
 
-However, note that if a driver puts a device into a runtime low power state
-and the system then goes into a system-wide sleep state, it normally ought
-to resume into that runtime low power state rather than "full on".  Such
-distinctions would be part of the driver-internal state machine for that
-hardware; the whole point of runtime power management is to be sure that
-drivers are decoupled in that way from the state machine governing phases
-of the system-wide power/sleep state transitions.
-
-
-Power Saving Techniques
------------------------
-Normally runtime power management is handled by the drivers without specific
-userspace or kernel intervention, by device-aware use of techniques like:
-
-    Using information provided by other system layers
-	- stay deeply "off" except between open() and close()
-	- if transceiver/PHY indicates "nobody connected", stay "off"
-	- application protocols may include power commands or hints
-
-    Using fewer CPU cycles
-	- using DMA instead of PIO
-	- removing timers, or making them lower frequency
-	- shortening "hot" code paths
-	- eliminating cache misses
-	- (sometimes) offloading work to device firmware
-
-    Reducing other resource costs
-	- gating off unused clocks in software (or hardware)
-	- switching off unused power supplies
-	- eliminating (or delaying/merging) IRQs
-	- tuning DMA to use word and/or burst modes
-
-    Using device-specific low power states
-	- using lower voltages
-	- avoiding needless DMA transfers
-
-Read your hardware documentation carefully to see the opportunities that
-may be available.  If you can, measure the actual power usage and check
-it against the budget established for your project.
-
-
-Examples:  USB hosts, system timer, system CPU
-----------------------------------------------
-USB host controllers make interesting, if complex, examples.  In many cases
-these have no work to do:  no USB devices are connected, or all of them are
-in the USB "suspend" state.  Linux host controller drivers can then disable
-periodic DMA transfers that would otherwise be a constant power drain on the
-memory subsystem, and enter a suspend state.  In power-aware controllers,
-entering that suspend state may disable the clock used with USB signaling,
-saving a certain amount of power.
-
-The controller will be woken from that state (with an IRQ) by changes to the
-signal state on the data lines of a given port, for example by an existing
-peripheral requesting "remote wakeup" or by plugging a new peripheral.  The
-same wakeup mechanism usually works from "standby" sleep states, and on some
-systems also from "suspend to RAM" (or even "suspend to disk") states.
-(Except that ACPI may be involved instead of normal IRQs, on some hardware.)
-
-System devices like timers and CPUs may have special roles in the platform
-power management scheme.  For example, system timers using a "dynamic tick"
-approach don't just save CPU cycles (by eliminating needless timer IRQs),
-but they may also open the door to using lower power CPU "idle" states that
-cost more than a jiffie to enter and exit.  On x86 systems these are states
-like "C3"; note that periodic DMA transfers from a USB host controller will
-also prevent entry to a C3 state, much like a periodic timer IRQ.
-
-That kind of runtime mechanism interaction is common.  "System On Chip" (SOC)
-processors often have low power idle modes that can't be entered unless
-certain medium-speed clocks (often 12 or 48 MHz) are gated off.  When the
-drivers gate those clocks effectively, then the system idle task may be able
-to use the lower power idle modes and thereby increase battery life.
-
-If the CPU can have a "cpufreq" driver, there also may be opportunities
-to shift to lower voltage settings and reduce the power cost of executing
-a given number of instructions.  (Without voltage adjustment, it's rare
-for cpufreq to save much power; the cost-per-instruction must go down.)
+A system-wide power transition can be started while some devices are in low
+power states due to runtime power management.  The system sleep PM callbacks
+should recognize such situations and react to them appropriately, but the
+necessary actions are subsystem-specific.
+
+In some cases the decision may be made at the subsystem level while in other
+cases the device driver may be left to decide.  In some cases it may be
+desirable to leave a suspended device in that state during a system-wide power
+transition, but in other cases the device must be put back into the full-power
+state temporarily, for example so that its system wakeup capability can be
+disabled.  This all depends on the hardware and the design of the subsystem and
+device driver in question.
+
+During system-wide resume from a sleep state it's best to put devices into the
+full-power state, as explained in Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.  Refer to
+that document for more information regarding this particular issue as well as
+for information on the device runtime power management framework in general.

Documentation/power/pci.txt

@@ -1,299 +1,1025 @@
-
 PCI Power Management
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 
-An overview of the concepts and the related functions in the Linux kernel
+Copyright (c) 2010 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc.
+
+An overview of concepts and the Linux kernel's interfaces related to PCI power
+management.  Based on previous work by Patrick Mochel <mochel@transmeta.com>
+(and others).
 
-Patrick Mochel <mochel@transmeta.com>
-(and others)
+This document only covers the aspects of power management specific to PCI
+devices.  For general description of the kernel's interfaces related to device
+power management refer to Documentation/power/devices.txt and
+Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.
 
 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-1. Overview
-2. How the PCI Subsystem Does Power Management
-3. PCI Utility Functions
-4. PCI Device Drivers
-5. Resources
-
-1. Overview
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The PCI Power Management Specification was introduced between the PCI 2.1 and
-PCI 2.2 Specifications. It a standard interface for controlling various 
-power management operations.
-
-Implementation of the PCI PM Spec is optional, as are several sub-components of
-it. If a device supports the PCI PM Spec, the device will have an 8 byte
-capability field in its PCI configuration space. This field is used to describe
-and control the standard PCI power management features.
-
-The PCI PM spec defines 4 operating states for devices (D0 - D3) and for buses
-(B0 - B3). The higher the number, the less power the device consumes. However,
-the higher the number, the longer the latency is for the device to return to 
-an operational state (D0).
-
-There are actually two D3 states.  When someone talks about D3, they usually
-mean D3hot, which corresponds to an ACPI D2 state (power is reduced, the
-device may lose some context).  But they may also mean D3cold, which is an
-ACPI D3 state (power is fully off, all state was discarded); or both.
-
-Bus power management is not covered in this version of this document.
-
-Note that all PCI devices support D0 and D3cold by default, regardless of
-whether or not they implement any of the PCI PM spec.
-
-The possible state transitions that a device can undergo are:
-
-+---------------------------+
-| Current State | New State |
-+---------------------------+
-| D0            | D1, D2, D3|
-+---------------------------+
-| D1            | D2, D3    |
-+---------------------------+
-| D2            | D3        |
-+---------------------------+
-| D1, D2, D3    | D0        |
-+---------------------------+
-
-Note that when the system is entering a global suspend state, all devices will
-be placed into D3 and when resuming, all devices will be placed into D0.
-However, when the system is running, other state transitions are possible.
-
-2. How The PCI Subsystem Handles Power Management
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The PCI suspend/resume functionality is accessed indirectly via the Power
-Management subsystem. At boot, the PCI driver registers a power management
-callback with that layer. Upon entering a suspend state, the PM layer iterates
-through all of its registered callbacks. This currently takes place only during
-APM state transitions.
-
-Upon going to sleep, the PCI subsystem walks its device tree twice. Both times,
-it does a depth first walk of the device tree. The first walk saves each of the
-device's state and checks for devices that will prevent the system from entering
-a global power state. The next walk then places the devices in a low power
+1. Hardware and Platform Support for PCI Power Management
+2. PCI Subsystem and Device Power Management
+3. PCI Device Drivers and Power Management
+4. Resources
+
+
+1. Hardware and Platform Support for PCI Power Management
+=========================================================
+
+1.1. Native and Platform-Based Power Management
+-----------------------------------------------
+In general, power management is a feature allowing one to save energy by putting
+devices into states in which they draw less power (low-power states) at the
+price of reduced functionality or performance.
+
+Usually, a device is put into a low-power state when it is underutilized or
+completely inactive.  However, when it is necessary to use the device once
+again, it has to be put back into the "fully functional" state (full-power
+state).  This may happen when there are some data for the device to handle or
+as a result of an external event requiring the device to be active, which may
+be signaled by the device itself.
+
+PCI devices may be put into low-power states in two ways, by using the device
+capabilities introduced by the PCI Bus Power Management Interface Specification,
+or with the help of platform firmware, such as an ACPI BIOS.  In the first
+approach, that is referred to as the native PCI power management (native PCI PM)
+in what follows, the device power state is changed as a result of writing a
+specific value into one of its standard configuration registers.  The second
+approach requires the platform firmware to provide special methods that may be
+used by the kernel to change the device's power state.
+
+Devices supporting the native PCI PM usually can generate wakeup signals called
+Power Management Events (PMEs) to let the kernel know about external events
+requiring the device to be active.  After receiving a PME the kernel is supposed
+to put the device that sent it into the full-power state.  However, the PCI Bus
+Power Management Interface Specification doesn't define any standard method of
+delivering the PME from the device to the CPU and the operating system kernel.
+It is assumed that the platform firmware will perform this task and therefore,
+even though a PCI device is set up to generate PMEs, it also may be necessary to
+prepare the platform firmware for notifying the CPU of the PMEs coming from the
+device (e.g. by generating interrupts).
+
+In turn, if the methods provided by the platform firmware are used for changing
+the power state of a device, usually the platform also provides a method for
+preparing the device to generate wakeup signals.  In that case, however, it
+often also is necessary to prepare the device for generating PMEs using the
+native PCI PM mechanism, because the method provided by the platform depends on
+that.
+
+Thus in many situations both the native and the platform-based power management
+mechanisms have to be used simultaneously to obtain the desired result.
+
+1.2. Native PCI Power Management
+--------------------------------
+The PCI Bus Power Management Interface Specification (PCI PM Spec) was
+introduced between the PCI 2.1 and PCI 2.2 Specifications.  It defined a
+standard interface for performing various operations related to power
+management.
+
+The implementation of the PCI PM Spec is optional for conventional PCI devices,
+but it is mandatory for PCI Express devices.  If a device supports the PCI PM
+Spec, it has an 8 byte power management capability field in its PCI
+configuration space.  This field is used to describe and control the standard
+features related to the native PCI power management.
+
+The PCI PM Spec defines 4 operating states for devices (D0-D3) and for buses
+(B0-B3).  The higher the number, the less power is drawn by the device or bus
+in that state.  However, the higher the number, the longer the latency for
+the device or bus to return to the full-power state (D0 or B0, respectively).
+
+There are two variants of the D3 state defined by the specification.  The first
+one is D3hot, referred to as the software accessible D3, because devices can be
+programmed to go into it.  The second one, D3cold, is the state that PCI devices
+are in when the supply voltage (Vcc) is removed from them.  It is not possible
+to program a PCI device to go into D3cold, although there may be a programmable
+interface for putting the bus the device is on into a state in which Vcc is
+removed from all devices on the bus.
+
+PCI bus power management, however, is not supported by the Linux kernel at the
+time of this writing and therefore it is not covered by this document.
+
+Note that every PCI device can be in the full-power state (D0) or in D3cold,
+regardless of whether or not it implements the PCI PM Spec.  In addition to
+that, if the PCI PM Spec is implemented by the device, it must support D3hot
+as well as D0.  The support for the D1 and D2 power states is optional.
+
+PCI devices supporting the PCI PM Spec can be programmed to go to any of the
+supported low-power states (except for D3cold).  While in D1-D3hot the
+standard configuration registers of the device must be accessible to software
+(i.e. the device is required to respond to PCI configuration accesses), although
+its I/O and memory spaces are then disabled.  This allows the device to be
+programmatically put into D0.  Thus the kernel can switch the device back and
+forth between D0 and the supported low-power states (except for D3cold) and the
+possible power state transitions the device can undergo are the following:
+
++----------------------------+
+| Current State | New State  |
++----------------------------+
+| D0            | D1, D2, D3 |
++----------------------------+
+| D1            | D2, D3     |
++----------------------------+
+| D2            | D3         |
++----------------------------+
+| D1, D2, D3    | D0         |
++----------------------------+
+
+The transition from D3cold to D0 occurs when the supply voltage is provided to
+the device (i.e. power is restored).  In that case the device returns to D0 with
+a full power-on reset sequence and the power-on defaults are restored to the
+device by hardware just as at initial power up.
+
+PCI devices supporting the PCI PM Spec can be programmed to generate PMEs
+while in a low-power state (D1-D3), but they are not required to be capable
+of generating PMEs from all supported low-power states.  In particular, the
+capability of generating PMEs from D3cold is optional and depends on the
+presence of additional voltage (3.3Vaux) allowing the device to remain
+sufficiently active to generate a wakeup signal.
+
+1.3. ACPI Device Power Management
+---------------------------------
+The platform firmware support for the power management of PCI devices is
+system-specific.  However, if the system in question is compliant with the
+Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) Specification, like the
+majority of x86-based systems, it is supposed to implement device power
+management interfaces defined by the ACPI standard.
+
+For this purpose the ACPI BIOS provides special functions called "control
+methods" that may be executed by the kernel to perform specific tasks, such as
+putting a device into a low-power state.  These control methods are encoded
+using special byte-code language called the ACPI Machine Language (AML) and
+stored in the machine's BIOS.  The kernel loads them from the BIOS and executes
+them as needed using an AML interpreter that translates the AML byte code into
+computations and memory or I/O space accesses.  This way, in theory, a BIOS
+writer can provide the kernel with a means to perform actions depending
+on the system design in a system-specific fashion.
+
+ACPI control methods may be divided into global control methods, that are not
+associated with any particular devices, and device control methods, that have
+to be defined separately for each device supposed to be handled with the help of
+the platform.  This means, in particular, that ACPI device control methods can
+only be used to handle devices that the BIOS writer knew about in advance.  The
+ACPI methods used for device power management fall into that category.
+
+The ACPI specification assumes that devices can be in one of four power states
+labeled as D0, D1, D2, and D3 that roughly correspond to the native PCI PM
+D0-D3 states (although the difference between D3hot and D3cold is not taken
+into account by ACPI).  Moreover, for each power state of a device there is a
+set of power resources that have to be enabled for the device to be put into
+that state.  These power resources are controlled (i.e. enabled or disabled)
+with the help of their own control methods, _ON and _OFF, that have to be
+defined individually for each of them.
+
+To put a device into the ACPI power state Dx (where x is a number between 0 and
+3 inclusive) the kernel is supposed to (1) enable the power resources required
+by the device in this state using their _ON control methods and (2) execute the
+_PSx control method defined for the device.  In addition to that, if the device
+is going to be put into a low-power state (D1-D3) and is supposed to generate
+wakeup signals from that state, the _DSW (or _PSW, replaced with _DSW by ACPI
+3.0) control method defined for it has to be executed before _PSx.  Power
+resources that are not required by the device in the target power state and are
+not required any more by any other device should be disabled (by executing their
+_OFF control methods).  If the current power state of the device is D3, it can
+only be put into D0 this way.
+
+However, quite often the power states of devices are changed during a
+system-wide transition into a sleep state or back into the working state.  ACPI
+defines four system sleep states, S1, S2, S3, and S4, and denotes the system
+working state as S0.  In general, the target system sleep (or working) state
+determines the highest power (lowest number) state the device can be put
+into and the kernel is supposed to obtain this information by executing the
+device's _SxD control method (where x is a number between 0 and 4 inclusive).
+If the device is required to wake up the system from the target sleep state, the
+lowest power (highest number) state it can be put into is also determined by the
+target state of the system.  The kernel is then supposed to use the device's
+_SxW control method to obtain the number of that state.  It also is supposed to
+use the device's _PRW control method to learn which power resources need to be
+enabled for the device to be able to generate wakeup signals.
+
+1.4. Wakeup Signaling
+---------------------
+Wakeup signals generated by PCI devices, either as native PCI PMEs, or as
+a result of the execution of the _DSW (or _PSW) ACPI control method before
+putting the device into a low-power state, have to be caught and handled as
+appropriate.  If they are sent while the system is in the working state
+(ACPI S0), they should be translated into interrupts so that the kernel can
+put the devices generating them into the full-power state and take care of the
+events that triggered them.  In turn, if they are sent while the system is
+sleeping, they should cause the system's core logic to trigger wakeup.
+
+On ACPI-based systems wakeup signals sent by conventional PCI devices are
+converted into ACPI General-Purpose Events (GPEs) which are hardware signals
+from the system core logic generated in response to various events that need to
+be acted upon.  Every GPE is associated with one or more sources of potentially
+interesting events.  In particular, a GPE may be associated with a PCI device
+capable of signaling wakeup.  The information on the connections between GPEs
+and event sources is recorded in the system's ACPI BIOS from where it can be
+read by the kernel.
+
+If a PCI device known to the system's ACPI BIOS signals wakeup, the GPE
+associated with it (if there is one) is triggered.  The GPEs associated with PCI
+bridges may also be triggered in response to a wakeup signal from one of the
+devices below the bridge (this also is the case for root bridges) and, for
+example, native PCI PMEs from devices unknown to the system's ACPI BIOS may be
+handled this way.
+
+A GPE may be triggered when the system is sleeping (i.e. when it is in one of
+the ACPI S1-S4 states), in which case system wakeup is started by its core logic
+(the device that was the source of the signal causing the system wakeup to occur
+may be identified later).  The GPEs used in such situations are referred to as
+wakeup GPEs.
+
+Usually, however, GPEs are also triggered when the system is in the working
+state (ACPI S0) and in that case the system's core logic generates a System
+Control Interrupt (SCI) to notify the kernel of the event.  Then, the SCI
+handler identifies the GPE that caused the interrupt to be generated which,
+in turn, allows the kernel to identify the source of the event (that may be
+a PCI device signaling wakeup).  The GPEs used for notifying the kernel of
+events occurring while the system is in the working state are referred to as
+runtime GPEs.
+
+Unfortunately, there is no standard way of handling wakeup signals sent by
+conventional PCI devices on systems that are not ACPI-based, but there is one
+for PCI Express devices.  Namely, the PCI Express Base Specification introduced
+a native mechanism for converting native PCI PMEs into interrupts generated by
+root ports.  For conventional PCI devices native PMEs are out-of-band, so they
+are routed separately and they need not pass through bridges (in principle they
+may be routed directly to the system's core logic), but for PCI Express devices
+they are in-band messages that have to pass through the PCI Express hierarchy,
+including the root port on the path from the device to the Root Complex.  Thus
+it was possible to introduce a mechanism by which a root port generates an
+interrupt whenever it receives a PME message from one of the devices below it.
+The PCI Express Requester ID of the device that sent the PME message is then
+recorded in one of the root port's configuration registers from where it may be
+read by the interrupt handler allowing the device to be identified.  [PME
+messages sent by PCI Express endpoints integrated with the Root Complex don't
+pass through root ports, but instead they cause a Root Complex Event Collector
+(if there is one) to generate interrupts.]
+
+In principle the native PCI Express PME signaling may also be used on ACPI-based
+systems along with the GPEs, but to use it the kernel has to ask the system's
+ACPI BIOS to release control of root port configuration registers.  The ACPI
+BIOS, however, is not required to allow the kernel to control these registers
+and if it doesn't do that, the kernel must not modify their contents.  Of course
+the native PCI Express PME signaling cannot be used by the kernel in that case.
+
+
+2. PCI Subsystem and Device Power Management
+============================================
+
+2.1. Device Power Management Callbacks
+--------------------------------------
+The PCI Subsystem participates in the power management of PCI devices in a
+number of ways.  First of all, it provides an intermediate code layer between
+the device power management core (PM core) and PCI device drivers.
+Specifically, the pm field of the PCI subsystem's struct bus_type object,
+pci_bus_type, points to a struct dev_pm_ops object, pci_dev_pm_ops, containing
+pointers to several device power management callbacks:
+
+const struct dev_pm_ops pci_dev_pm_ops = {
+	.prepare = pci_pm_prepare,
+	.complete = pci_pm_complete,
+	.suspend = pci_pm_suspend,
+	.resume = pci_pm_resume,
+	.freeze = pci_pm_freeze,
+	.thaw = pci_pm_thaw,
+	.poweroff = pci_pm_poweroff,
+	.restore = pci_pm_restore,
+	.suspend_noirq = pci_pm_suspend_noirq,
+	.resume_noirq = pci_pm_resume_noirq,
+	.freeze_noirq = pci_pm_freeze_noirq,
+	.thaw_noirq = pci_pm_thaw_noirq,
+	.poweroff_noirq = pci_pm_poweroff_noirq,
+	.restore_noirq = pci_pm_restore_noirq,
+	.runtime_suspend = pci_pm_runtime_suspend,
+	.runtime_resume = pci_pm_runtime_resume,
+	.runtime_idle = pci_pm_runtime_idle,
+};
+
+These callbacks are executed by the PM core in various situations related to
+device power management and they, in turn, execute power management callbacks
+provided by PCI device drivers.  They also perform power management operations
+involving some standard configuration registers of PCI devices that device
+drivers need not know or care about.
+
+The structure representing a PCI device, struct pci_dev, contains several fields
+that these callbacks operate on:
+
+struct pci_dev {
+	...
+	pci_power_t     current_state;  /* Current operating state. */
+	int		pm_cap;		/* PM capability offset in the
+					   configuration space */
+	unsigned int	pme_support:5;	/* Bitmask of states from which PME#
+					   can be generated */
+	unsigned int	pme_interrupt:1;/* Is native PCIe PME signaling used? */
+	unsigned int	d1_support:1;	/* Low power state D1 is supported */
+	unsigned int	d2_support:1;	/* Low power state D2 is supported */
+	unsigned int	no_d1d2:1;	/* D1 and D2 are forbidden */
+	unsigned int	wakeup_prepared:1;  /* Device prepared for wake up */
+	unsigned int	d3_delay;	/* D3->D0 transition time in ms */
+	...
+};
+
+They also indirectly use some fields of the struct device that is embedded in
+struct pci_dev.
+
+2.2. Device Initialization
+--------------------------
+The PCI subsystem's first task related to device power management is to
+prepare the device for power management and initialize the fields of struct
+pci_dev used for this purpose.  This happens in two functions defined in
+drivers/pci/pci.c, pci_pm_init() and platform_pci_wakeup_init().
+
+The first of these functions checks if the device supports native PCI PM
+and if that's the case the offset of its power management capability structure
+in the configuration space is stored in the pm_cap field of the device's struct
+pci_dev object.  Next, the function checks which PCI low-power states are
+supported by the device and from which low-power states the device can generate
+native PCI PMEs.  The power management fields of the device's struct pci_dev and
+the struct device embedded in it are updated accordingly and the generation of
+PMEs by the device is disabled.
+
+The second function checks if the device can be prepared to signal wakeup with
+the help of the platform firmware, such as the ACPI BIOS.  If that is the case,
+the function updates the wakeup fields in struct device embedded in the
+device's struct pci_dev and uses the firmware-provided method to prevent the
+device from signaling wakeup.
+
+At this point the device is ready for power management.  For driverless devices,
+however, this functionality is limited to a few basic operations carried out
+during system-wide transitions to a sleep state and back to the working state.
+
+2.3. Runtime Device Power Management
+------------------------------------
+The PCI subsystem plays a vital role in the runtime power management of PCI
+devices.  For this purpose it uses the general runtime power management
+(runtime PM) framework described in Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.
+Namely, it provides subsystem-level callbacks:
+
+	pci_pm_runtime_suspend()
+	pci_pm_runtime_resume()
+	pci_pm_runtime_idle()
+
+that are executed by the core runtime PM routines.  It also implements the
+entire mechanics necessary for handling runtime wakeup signals from PCI devices
+in low-power states, which at the time of this writing works for both the native
+PCI Express PME signaling and the ACPI GPE-based wakeup signaling described in
+Section 1.
+
+First, a PCI device is put into a low-power state, or suspended, with the help
+of pm_schedule_suspend() or pm_runtime_suspend() which for PCI devices call
+pci_pm_runtime_suspend() to do the actual job.  For this to work, the device's
+driver has to provide a pm->runtime_suspend() callback (see below), which is
+run by pci_pm_runtime_suspend() as the first action.  If the driver's callback
+returns successfully, the device's standard configuration registers are saved,
+the device is prepared to generate wakeup signals and, finally, it is put into
+the target low-power state.
+
+The low-power state to put the device into is the lowest-power (highest number)
+state from which it can signal wakeup.  The exact method of signaling wakeup is
+system-dependent and is determined by the PCI subsystem on the basis of the
+reported capabilities of the device and the platform firmware.  To prepare the
+device for signaling wakeup and put it into the selected low-power state, the
+PCI subsystem can use the platform firmware as well as the device's native PCI
+PM capabilities, if supported.
+
+It is expected that the device driver's pm->runtime_suspend() callback will
+not attempt to prepare the device for signaling wakeup or to put it into a
+low-power state.  The driver ought to leave these tasks to the PCI subsystem
+that has all of the information necessary to perform them.
+
+A suspended device is brought back into the "active" state, or resumed,
+with the help of pm_request_resume() or pm_runtime_resume() which both call
+pci_pm_runtime_resume() for PCI devices.  Again, this only works if the device's
+driver provides a pm->runtime_resume() callback (see below).  However, before
+the driver's callback is executed, pci_pm_runtime_resume() brings the device
+back into the full-power state, prevents it from signaling wakeup while in that
+state and restores its standard configuration registers.  Thus the driver's
+callback need not worry about the PCI-specific aspects of the device resume.
+
+Note that generally pci_pm_runtime_resume() may be called in two different
+situations.  First, it may be called at the request of the device's driver, for
+example if there are some data for it to process.  Second, it may be called
+as a result of a wakeup signal from the device itself (this sometimes is
+referred to as "remote wakeup").  Of course, for this purpose the wakeup signal
+is handled in one of the ways described in Section 1 and finally converted into
+a notification for the PCI subsystem after the source device has been
+identified.
+
+The pci_pm_runtime_idle() function, called for PCI devices by pm_runtime_idle()
+and pm_request_idle(), executes the device driver's pm->runtime_idle()
+callback, if defined, and if that callback doesn't return error code (or is not
+present at all), suspends the device with the help of pm_runtime_suspend().
+Sometimes pci_pm_runtime_idle() is called automatically by the PM core (for
+example, it is called right after the device has just been resumed), in which
+cases it is expected to suspend the device if that makes sense.  Usually,
+however, the PCI subsystem doesn't really know if the device really can be
+suspended, so it lets the device's driver decide by running its
+pm->runtime_idle() callback.
+
+2.4. System-Wide Power Transitions
+----------------------------------
+There are a few different types of system-wide power transitions, described in
+Documentation/power/devices.txt.  Each of them requires devices to be handled
+in a specific way and the PM core executes subsystem-level power management
+callbacks for this purpose.  They are executed in phases such that each phase
+involves executing the same subsystem-level callback for every device belonging
+to the given subsystem before the next phase begins.  These phases always run
+after tasks have been frozen.
+
+2.4.1. System Suspend
+
+When the system is going into a sleep state in which the contents of memory will
+be preserved, such as one of the ACPI sleep states S1-S3, the phases are:
+
+	prepare, suspend, suspend_noirq.
+
+The following PCI bus type's callbacks, respectively, are used in these phases:
+
+	pci_pm_prepare()
+	pci_pm_suspend()
+	pci_pm_suspend_noirq()
+
+The pci_pm_prepare() routine first puts the device into the "fully functional"
+state with the help of pm_runtime_resume().  Then, it executes the device
+driver's pm->prepare() callback if defined (i.e. if the driver's struct
+dev_pm_ops object is present and the prepare pointer in that object is valid).
+
+The pci_pm_suspend() routine first checks if the device's driver implements
+legacy PCI suspend routines (see Section 3), in which case the driver's legacy
+suspend callback is executed, if present, and its result is returned.  Next, if
+the device's driver doesn't provide a struct dev_pm_ops object (containing
+pointers to the driver's callbacks), pci_pm_default_suspend() is called, which
+simply turns off the device's bus master capability and runs
+pcibios_disable_device() to disable it, unless the device is a bridge (PCI
+bridges are ignored by this routine).  Next, the device driver's pm->suspend()
+callback is executed, if defined, and its result is returned if it fails.
+Finally, pci_fixup_device() is called to apply hardware suspend quirks related
+to the device if necessary.
+
+Note that the suspend phase is carried out asynchronously for PCI devices, so
+the pci_pm_suspend() callback may be executed in parallel for any pair of PCI
+devices that don't depend on each other in a known way (i.e. none of the paths
+in the device tree from the root bridge to a leaf device contains both of them).
+
+The pci_pm_suspend_noirq() routine is executed after suspend_device_irqs() has
+been called, which means that the device driver's interrupt handler won't be
+invoked while this routine is running.  It first checks if the device's driver
+implements legacy PCI suspends routines (Section 3), in which case the legacy
+late suspend routine is called and its result is returned (the standard
+configuration registers of the device are saved if the driver's callback hasn't
+done that).  Second, if the device driver's struct dev_pm_ops object is not
+present, the device's standard configuration registers are saved and the routine
+returns success.  Otherwise the device driver's pm->suspend_noirq() callback is
+executed, if present, and its result is returned if it fails.  Next, if the
+device's standard configuration registers haven't been saved yet (one of the
+device driver's callbacks executed before might do that), pci_pm_suspend_noirq()
+saves them, prepares the device to signal wakeup (if necessary) and puts it into
+a low-power state.
+
+The low-power state to put the device into is the lowest-power (highest number)
+state from which it can signal wakeup while the system is in the target sleep
+state.  Just like in the runtime PM case described above, the mechanism of
+signaling wakeup is system-dependent and determined by the PCI subsystem, which
+is also responsible for preparing the device to signal wakeup from the system's
+target sleep state as appropriate.
+
+PCI device drivers (that don't implement legacy power management callbacks) are
+generally not expected to prepare devices for signaling wakeup or to put them
+into low-power states.  However, if one of the driver's suspend callbacks
+(pm->suspend() or pm->suspend_noirq()) saves the device's standard configuration
+registers, pci_pm_suspend_noirq() will assume that the device has been prepared
+to signal wakeup and put into a low-power state by the driver (the driver is
+then assumed to have used the helper functions provided by the PCI subsystem for
+this purpose).  PCI device drivers are not encouraged to do that, but in some
+rare cases doing that in the driver may be the optimum approach.
+
+2.4.2. System Resume
+
+When the system is undergoing a transition from a sleep state in which the
+contents of memory have been preserved, such as one of the ACPI sleep states
+S1-S3, into the working state (ACPI S0), the phases are:
+
+	resume_noirq, resume, complete.
+
+The following PCI bus type's callbacks, respectively, are executed in these
+phases:
+
+	pci_pm_resume_noirq()
+	pci_pm_resume()
+	pci_pm_complete()
+
+The pci_pm_resume_noirq() routine first puts the device into the full-power
+state, restores its standard configuration registers and applies early resume
+hardware quirks related to the device, if necessary.  This is done
+unconditionally, regardless of whether or not the device's driver implements
+legacy PCI power management callbacks (this way all PCI devices are in the
+full-power state and their standard configuration registers have been restored
+when their interrupt handlers are invoked for the first time during resume,
+which allows the kernel to avoid problems with the handling of shared interrupts
+by drivers whose devices are still suspended).  If legacy PCI power management
+callbacks (see Section 3) are implemented by the device's driver, the legacy
+early resume callback is executed and its result is returned.  Otherwise, the
+device driver's pm->resume_noirq() callback is executed, if defined, and its
+result is returned.
+
+The pci_pm_resume() routine first checks if the device's standard configuration
+registers have been restored and restores them if that's not the case (this
+only is necessary in the error path during a failing suspend).  Next, resume
+hardware quirks related to the device are applied, if necessary, and if the
+device's driver implements legacy PCI power management callbacks (see
+Section 3), the driver's legacy resume callback is executed and its result is
+returned.  Otherwise, the device's wakeup signaling mechanisms are blocked and
+its driver's pm->resume() callback is executed, if defined (the callback's
+result is then returned).
+
+The resume phase is carried out asynchronously for PCI devices, like the
+suspend phase described above, which means that if two PCI devices don't depend
+on each other in a known way, the pci_pm_resume() routine may be executed for
+the both of them in parallel.
+
+The pci_pm_complete() routine only executes the device driver's pm->complete()
+callback, if defined.
+
+2.4.3. System Hibernation
+
+System hibernation is more complicated than system suspend, because it requires
+a system image to be created and written into a persistent storage medium.  The
+image is created atomically and all devices are quiesced, or frozen, before that
+happens.
+
+The freezing of devices is carried out after enough memory has been freed (at
+the time of this writing the image creation requires at least 50% of system RAM
+to be free) in the following three phases:
+
+	prepare, freeze, freeze_noirq
+
+that correspond to the PCI bus type's callbacks:
+
+	pci_pm_prepare()
+	pci_pm_freeze()
+	pci_pm_freeze_noirq()
+
+This means that the prepare phase is exactly the same as for system suspend.
+The other two phases, however, are different.
+
+The pci_pm_freeze() routine is quite similar to pci_pm_suspend(), but it runs
+the device driver's pm->freeze() callback, if defined, instead of pm->suspend(),
+and it doesn't apply the suspend-related hardware quirks.  It is executed
+asynchronously for different PCI devices that don't depend on each other in a
+known way.
+
+The pci_pm_freeze_noirq() routine, in turn, is similar to
+pci_pm_suspend_noirq(), but it calls the device driver's pm->freeze_noirq()
+routine instead of pm->suspend_noirq().  It also doesn't attempt to prepare the
+device for signaling wakeup and put it into a low-power state.  Still, it saves
+the device's standard configuration registers if they haven't been saved by one
+of the driver's callbacks.
+
+Once the image has been created, it has to be saved.  However, at this point all
+devices are frozen and they cannot handle I/O, while their ability to handle
+I/O is obviously necessary for the image saving.  Thus they have to be brought
+back to the fully functional state and this is done in the following phases:
+
+	thaw_noirq, thaw, complete
+
+using the following PCI bus type's callbacks:
+
+	pci_pm_thaw_noirq()
+	pci_pm_thaw()
+	pci_pm_complete()
+
+respectively.
+
+The first of them, pci_pm_thaw_noirq(), is analogous to pci_pm_resume_noirq(),
+but it doesn't put the device into the full power state and doesn't attempt to
+restore its standard configuration registers.  It also executes the device
+driver's pm->thaw_noirq() callback, if defined, instead of pm->resume_noirq().
+
+The pci_pm_thaw() routine is similar to pci_pm_resume(), but it runs the device
+driver's pm->thaw() callback instead of pm->resume().  It is executed
+asynchronously for different PCI devices that don't depend on each other in a
+known way.
+
+The complete phase it the same as for system resume.
+
+After saving the image, devices need to be powered down before the system can
+enter the target sleep state (ACPI S4 for ACPI-based systems).  This is done in
+three phases:
+
+	prepare, poweroff, poweroff_noirq
+
+where the prepare phase is exactly the same as for system suspend.  The other
+two phases are analogous to the suspend and suspend_noirq phases, respectively.
+The PCI subsystem-level callbacks they correspond to
+
+	pci_pm_poweroff()
+	pci_pm_poweroff_noirq()
+
+work in analogy with pci_pm_suspend() and pci_pm_poweroff_noirq(), respectively,
+although they don't attempt to save the device's standard configuration
+registers.
+
+2.4.4. System Restore
+
+System restore requires a hibernation image to be loaded into memory and the
+pre-hibernation memory contents to be restored before the pre-hibernation system
+activity can be resumed.
+
+As described in Documentation/power/devices.txt, the hibernation image is loaded
+into memory by a fresh instance of the kernel, called the boot kernel, which in
+turn is loaded and run by a boot loader in the usual way.  After the boot kernel
+has loaded the image, it needs to replace its own code and data with the code
+and data of the "hibernated" kernel stored within the image, called the image
+kernel.  For this purpose all devices are frozen just like before creating
+the image during hibernation, in the
+
+	prepare, freeze, freeze_noirq
+
+phases described above.  However, the devices affected by these phases are only
+those having drivers in the boot kernel; other devices will still be in whatever
+state the boot loader left them.
+
+Should the restoration of the pre-hibernation memory contents fail, the boot
+kernel would go through the "thawing" procedure described above, using the
+thaw_noirq, thaw, and complete phases (that will only affect the devices having
+drivers in the boot kernel), and then continue running normally.
+
+If the pre-hibernation memory contents are restored successfully, which is the
+usual situation, control is passed to the image kernel, which then becomes
+responsible for bringing the system back to the working state.  To achieve this,
+it must restore the devices' pre-hibernation functionality, which is done much
+like waking up from the memory sleep state, although it involves different
+phases:
+
+	restore_noirq, restore, complete
+
+The first two of these are analogous to the resume_noirq and resume phases
+described above, respectively, and correspond to the following PCI subsystem
+callbacks:
+
+	pci_pm_restore_noirq()
+	pci_pm_restore()
+
+These callbacks work in analogy with pci_pm_resume_noirq() and pci_pm_resume(),
+respectively, but they execute the device driver's pm->restore_noirq() and
+pm->restore() callbacks, if available.
+
+The complete phase is carried out in exactly the same way as during system
+resume.
+
+
+3. PCI Device Drivers and Power Management
+==========================================
+
+3.1. Power Management Callbacks
+-------------------------------
+PCI device drivers participate in power management by providing callbacks to be
+executed by the PCI subsystem's power management routines described above and by
+controlling the runtime power management of their devices.
+
+At the time of this writing there are two ways to define power management
+callbacks for a PCI device driver, the recommended one, based on using a
+dev_pm_ops structure described in Documentation/power/devices.txt, and the
+"legacy" one, in which the .suspend(), .suspend_late(), .resume_early(), and
+.resume() callbacks from struct pci_driver are used.  The legacy approach,
+however, doesn't allow one to define runtime power management callbacks and is
+not really suitable for any new drivers.  Therefore it is not covered by this
+document (refer to the source code to learn more about it).
+
+It is recommended that all PCI device drivers define a struct dev_pm_ops object
+containing pointers to power management (PM) callbacks that will be executed by
+the PCI subsystem's PM routines in various circumstances.  A pointer to the
+driver's struct dev_pm_ops object has to be assigned to the driver.pm field in
+its struct pci_driver object.  Once that has happened, the "legacy" PM callbacks
+in struct pci_driver are ignored (even if they are not NULL).
+
+The PM callbacks in struct dev_pm_ops are not mandatory and if they are not
+defined (i.e. the respective fields of struct dev_pm_ops are unset) the PCI
+subsystem will handle the device in a simplified default manner.  If they are
+defined, though, they are expected to behave as described in the following
+subsections.
+
+3.1.1. prepare()
+
+The prepare() callback is executed during system suspend, during hibernation
+(when a hibernation image is about to be created), during power-off after
+saving a hibernation image and during system restore, when a hibernation image
+has just been loaded into memory.
+
+This callback is only necessary if the driver's device has children that in
+general may be registered at any time.  In that case the role of the prepare()
+callback is to prevent new children of the device from being registered until
+one of the resume_noirq(), thaw_noirq(), or restore_noirq() callbacks is run.
+
+In addition to that the prepare() callback may carry out some operations
+preparing the device to be suspended, although it should not allocate memory
+(if additional memory is required to suspend the device, it has to be
+preallocated earlier, for example in a suspend/hibernate notifier as described
+in Documentation/power/notifiers.txt).
+
+3.1.2. suspend()
+
+The suspend() callback is only executed during system suspend, after prepare()
+callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system.
+
+This callback is expected to quiesce the device and prepare it to be put into a
+low-power state by the PCI subsystem.  It is not required (in fact it even is
+not recommended) that a PCI driver's suspend() callback save the standard
+configuration registers of the device, prepare it for waking up the system, or
+put it into a low-power state.  All of these operations can very well be taken
+care of by the PCI subsystem, without the driver's participation.
+
+However, in some rare case it is convenient to carry out these operations in
+a PCI driver.  Then, pci_save_state(), pci_prepare_to_sleep(), and
+pci_set_power_state() should be used to save the device's standard configuration
+registers, to prepare it for system wakeup (if necessary), and to put it into a
+low-power state, respectively.  Moreover, if the driver calls pci_save_state(),
+the PCI subsystem will not execute either pci_prepare_to_sleep(), or
+pci_set_power_state() for its device, so the driver is then responsible for
+handling the device as appropriate.
+
+While the suspend() callback is being executed, the driver's interrupt handler
+can be invoked to handle an interrupt from the device, so all suspend-related
+operations relying on the driver's ability to handle interrupts should be
+carried out in this callback.
+
+3.1.3. suspend_noirq()
+
+The suspend_noirq() callback is only executed during system suspend, after
+suspend() callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system and
+after device interrupts have been disabled by the PM core.
+
+The difference between suspend_noirq() and suspend() is that the driver's
+interrupt handler will not be invoked while suspend_noirq() is running.  Thus
+suspend_noirq() can carry out operations that would cause race conditions to
+arise if they were performed in suspend().
+
+3.1.4. freeze()
+
+The freeze() callback is hibernation-specific and is executed in two situations,
+during hibernation, after prepare() callbacks have been executed for all devices
+in preparation for the creation of a system image, and during restore,
+after a system image has been loaded into memory from persistent storage and the
+prepare() callbacks have been executed for all devices.
+
+The role of this callback is analogous to the role of the suspend() callback
+described above.  In fact, they only need to be different in the rare cases when
+the driver takes the responsibility for putting the device into a low-power
 state.
 
-The first walk allows a graceful recovery in the event of a failure, since none
-of the devices have actually been powered down.
-
-In both walks, in particular the second, all children of a bridge are touched
-before the actual bridge itself. This allows the bridge to retain power while
-its children are being accessed.
-
-Upon resuming from sleep, just the opposite must be true: all bridges must be
-powered on and restored before their children are powered on. This is easily
-accomplished with a breadth-first walk of the PCI device tree.
-
-
-3. PCI Utility Functions
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-These are helper functions designed to be called by individual device drivers.
-Assuming that a device behaves as advertised, these should be applicable in most
-cases. However, results may vary.
-
-Note that these functions are never implicitly called for the driver. The driver
-is always responsible for deciding when and if to call these.
-
-
-pci_save_state
---------------
-
-Usage:
-	pci_save_state(struct pci_dev *dev);
-
-Description:
-	Save first 64 bytes of PCI config space, along with any additional
-	PCI-Express or PCI-X information.
-
-
-pci_restore_state
------------------
-
-Usage:
-	pci_restore_state(struct pci_dev *dev);
-
-Description:
-	Restore previously saved config space.
-
-
-pci_set_power_state
--------------------
-
-Usage:
-	pci_set_power_state(struct pci_dev *dev, pci_power_t state);
-
-Description:
-	Transition device to low power state using PCI PM Capabilities
-	registers.
-
-	Will fail under one of the following conditions:
-	- If state is less than current state, but not D0 (illegal transition)
-	- Device doesn't support PM Capabilities
-	- Device does not support requested state
-
-
-pci_enable_wake
----------------
-
-Usage:
-	pci_enable_wake(struct pci_dev *dev, pci_power_t state, int enable);
-
-Description:
-	Enable device to generate PME# during low power state using PCI PM 
-	Capabilities.
-
-	Checks whether if device supports generating PME# from requested state
-	and fail if it does not, unless enable == 0 (request is to disable wake
-	events, which is implicit if it doesn't even support it in the first
-	place).
-
-	Note that the PMC Register in the device's PM Capabilities has a bitmask
-	of the states it supports generating PME# from. D3hot is bit 3 and
-	D3cold is bit 4. So, while a value of 4 as the state may not seem
-	semantically correct, it is. 
-
-
-4. PCI Device Drivers
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-These functions are intended for use by individual drivers, and are defined in 
-struct pci_driver:
-
-        int  (*suspend) (struct pci_dev *dev, pm_message_t state);
-        int  (*resume) (struct pci_dev *dev);
-
-
-suspend
--------
-
-Usage:
-
-if (dev->driver && dev->driver->suspend)
-	dev->driver->suspend(dev,state);
-
-A driver uses this function to actually transition the device into a low power
-state. This should include disabling I/O, IRQs, and bus-mastering, as well as
-physically transitioning the device to a lower power state; it may also include
-calls to pci_enable_wake().
-
-Bus mastering may be disabled by doing:
-
-pci_disable_device(dev);
-
-For devices that support the PCI PM Spec, this may be used to set the device's
-power state to match the suspend() parameter:
-
-pci_set_power_state(dev,state);
-
-The driver is also responsible for disabling any other device-specific features
-(e.g blanking screen, turning off on-card memory, etc).
-
-The driver should be sure to track the current state of the device, as it may
-obviate the need for some operations.
-
-The driver should update the current_state field in its pci_dev structure in
-this function, except for PM-capable devices when pci_set_power_state is used.
-
-resume
-------
-
-Usage:
-
-if (dev->driver && dev->driver->resume)
-	dev->driver->resume(dev)
+In that cases the freeze() callback should not prepare the device system wakeup
+or put it into a low-power state.  Still, either it or freeze_noirq() should
+save the device's standard configuration registers using pci_save_state().
 
-The resume callback may be called from any power state, and is always meant to
-transition the device to the D0 state. 
+3.1.5. freeze_noirq()
 
-The driver is responsible for reenabling any features of the device that had
-been disabled during previous suspend calls, such as IRQs and bus mastering,
-as well as calling pci_restore_state().
+The freeze_noirq() callback is hibernation-specific.  It is executed during
+hibernation, after prepare() and freeze() callbacks have been executed for all
+devices in preparation for the creation of a system image, and during restore,
+after a system image has been loaded into memory and after prepare() and
+freeze() callbacks have been executed for all devices.  It is always executed
+after device interrupts have been disabled by the PM core.
 
-If the device is currently in D3, it may need to be reinitialized in resume().
+The role of this callback is analogous to the role of the suspend_noirq()
+callback described above and it very rarely is necessary to define
+freeze_noirq().
 
-  * Some types of devices, like bus controllers, will preserve context in D3hot
-    (using Vcc power).  Their drivers will often want to avoid re-initializing
-    them after re-entering D0 (perhaps to avoid resetting downstream devices).
+The difference between freeze_noirq() and freeze() is analogous to the
+difference between suspend_noirq() and suspend().
 
-  * Other kinds of devices in D3hot will discard device context as part of a
-    soft reset when re-entering the D0 state.
-    
-  * Devices resuming from D3cold always go through a power-on reset.  Some
-    device context can also be preserved using Vaux power.
+3.1.6. poweroff()
 
-  * Some systems hide D3cold resume paths from drivers.  For example, on PCs
-    the resume path for suspend-to-disk often runs BIOS powerup code, which
-    will sometimes re-initialize the device.
+The poweroff() callback is hibernation-specific.  It is executed when the system
+is about to be powered off after saving a hibernation image to a persistent
+storage.  prepare() callbacks are executed for all devices before poweroff() is
+called.
 
-To handle resets during D3 to D0 transitions, it may be convenient to share
-device initialization code between probe() and resume().  Device parameters
-can also be saved before the driver suspends into D3, avoiding re-probe.
+The role of this callback is analogous to the role of the suspend() and freeze()
+callbacks described above, although it does not need to save the contents of
+the device's registers.  In particular, if the driver wants to put the device
+into a low-power state itself instead of allowing the PCI subsystem to do that,
+the poweroff() callback should use pci_prepare_to_sleep() and
+pci_set_power_state() to prepare the device for system wakeup and to put it
+into a low-power state, respectively, but it need not save the device's standard
+configuration registers.
 
-If the device supports the PCI PM Spec, it can use this to physically transition
-the device to D0:
+3.1.7. poweroff_noirq()
 
-pci_set_power_state(dev,0);
+The poweroff_noirq() callback is hibernation-specific.  It is executed after
+poweroff() callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system.
 
-Note that if the entire system is transitioning out of a global sleep state, all
-devices will be placed in the D0 state, so this is not necessary. However, in
-the event that the device is placed in the D3 state during normal operation,
-this call is necessary. It is impossible to determine which of the two events is
-taking place in the driver, so it is always a good idea to make that call.
+The role of this callback is analogous to the role of the suspend_noirq() and
+freeze_noirq() callbacks described above, but it does not need to save the
+contents of the device's registers.
 
-The driver should take note of the state that it is resuming from in order to
-ensure correct (and speedy) operation.
+The difference between poweroff_noirq() and poweroff() is analogous to the
+difference between suspend_noirq() and suspend().
 
-The driver should update the current_state field in its pci_dev structure in
-this function, except for PM-capable devices when pci_set_power_state is used.
+3.1.8. resume_noirq()
 
+The resume_noirq() callback is only executed during system resume, after the
+PM core has enabled the non-boot CPUs.  The driver's interrupt handler will not
+be invoked while resume_noirq() is running, so this callback can carry out
+operations that might race with the interrupt handler.
 
+Since the PCI subsystem unconditionally puts all devices into the full power
+state in the resume_noirq phase of system resume and restores their standard
+configuration registers, resume_noirq() is usually not necessary.  In general
+it should only be used for performing operations that would lead to race
+conditions if carried out by resume().
 
-A reference implementation
--------------------------
-.suspend()
-{
-	/* driver specific operations */
+3.1.9. resume()
 
-	/* Disable IRQ */
-	free_irq();
-	/* If using MSI */
-	pci_disable_msi();
+The resume() callback is only executed during system resume, after
+resume_noirq() callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system and
+device interrupts have been enabled by the PM core.
 
-	pci_save_state();
-	pci_enable_wake();
-	/* Disable IO/bus master/irq router */
-	pci_disable_device();
-	pci_set_power_state(pci_choose_state());
-}
+This callback is responsible for restoring the pre-suspend configuration of the
+device and bringing it back to the fully functional state.  The device should be
+able to process I/O in a usual way after resume() has returned.
 
-.resume()
-{
-	pci_set_power_state(PCI_D0);
-	pci_restore_state();
-	/* device's irq possibly is changed, driver should take care */
-	pci_enable_device();
-	pci_set_master();
+3.1.10. thaw_noirq()
 
-	/* if using MSI, device's vector possibly is changed */
-	pci_enable_msi();
+The thaw_noirq() callback is hibernation-specific.  It is executed after a
+system image has been created and the non-boot CPUs have been enabled by the PM
+core, in the thaw_noirq phase of hibernation.  It also may be executed if the
+loading of a hibernation image fails during system restore (it is then executed
+after enabling the non-boot CPUs).  The driver's interrupt handler will not be
+invoked while thaw_noirq() is running.
 
-	request_irq();
-	/* driver specific operations; */
-}
+The role of this callback is analogous to the role of resume_noirq().  The
+difference between these two callbacks is that thaw_noirq() is executed after
+freeze() and freeze_noirq(), so in general it does not need to modify the
+contents of the device's registers.
 
-This is a typical implementation. Drivers can slightly change the order
-of the operations in the implementation, ignore some operations or add
-more driver specific operations in it, but drivers should do something like
-this on the whole.
+3.1.11. thaw()
 
-5. Resources
-~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The thaw() callback is hibernation-specific.  It is executed after thaw_noirq()
+callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system and after device
+interrupts have been enabled by the PM core.
 
-PCI Local Bus Specification 
-PCI Bus Power Management Interface Specification
+This callback is responsible for restoring the pre-freeze configuration of
+the device, so that it will work in a usual way after thaw() has returned.
 
-  http://www.pcisig.com
+3.1.12. restore_noirq()
 
+The restore_noirq() callback is hibernation-specific.  It is executed in the
+restore_noirq phase of hibernation, when the boot kernel has passed control to
+the image kernel and the non-boot CPUs have been enabled by the image kernel's
+PM core.
+
+This callback is analogous to resume_noirq() with the exception that it cannot
+make any assumption on the previous state of the device, even if the BIOS (or
+generally the platform firmware) is known to preserve that state over a
+suspend-resume cycle.
+
+For the vast majority of PCI device drivers there is no difference between
+resume_noirq() and restore_noirq().
+
+3.1.13. restore()
+
+The restore() callback is hibernation-specific.  It is executed after
+restore_noirq() callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system and
+after the PM core has enabled device drivers' interrupt handlers to be invoked.
+
+This callback is analogous to resume(), just like restore_noirq() is analogous
+to resume_noirq().  Consequently, the difference between restore_noirq() and
+restore() is analogous to the difference between resume_noirq() and resume().
+
+For the vast majority of PCI device drivers there is no difference between
+resume() and restore().
+
+3.1.14. complete()
+
+The complete() callback is executed in the following situations:
+  - during system resume, after resume() callbacks have been executed for all
+    devices,
+  - during hibernation, before saving the system image, after thaw() callbacks
+    have been executed for all devices,
+  - during system restore, when the system is going back to its pre-hibernation
+    state, after restore() callbacks have been executed for all devices.
+It also may be executed if the loading of a hibernation image into memory fails
+(in that case it is run after thaw() callbacks have been executed for all
+devices that have drivers in the boot kernel).
+
+This callback is entirely optional, although it may be necessary if the
+prepare() callback performs operations that need to be reversed.
+
+3.1.15. runtime_suspend()
+
+The runtime_suspend() callback is specific to device runtime power management
+(runtime PM).  It is executed by the PM core's runtime PM framework when the
+device is about to be suspended (i.e. quiesced and put into a low-power state)
+at run time.
+
+This callback is responsible for freezing the device and preparing it to be
+put into a low-power state, but it must allow the PCI subsystem to perform all
+of the PCI-specific actions necessary for suspending the device.
+
+3.1.16. runtime_resume()
+
+The runtime_resume() callback is specific to device runtime PM.  It is executed
+by the PM core's runtime PM framework when the device is about to be resumed
+(i.e. put into the full-power state and programmed to process I/O normally) at
+run time.
+
+This callback is responsible for restoring the normal functionality of the
+device after it has been put into the full-power state by the PCI subsystem.
+The device is expected to be able to process I/O in the usual way after
+runtime_resume() has returned.
+
+3.1.17. runtime_idle()
+
+The runtime_idle() callback is specific to device runtime PM.  It is executed
+by the PM core's runtime PM framework whenever it may be desirable to suspend
+the device according to the PM core's information.  In particular, it is
+automatically executed right after runtime_resume() has returned in case the
+resume of the device has happened as a result of a spurious event.
+
+This callback is optional, but if it is not implemented or if it returns 0, the
+PCI subsystem will call pm_runtime_suspend() for the device, which in turn will
+cause the driver's runtime_suspend() callback to be executed.
+
+3.1.18. Pointing Multiple Callback Pointers to One Routine
+
+Although in principle each of the callbacks described in the previous
+subsections can be defined as a separate function, it often is convenient to
+point two or more members of struct dev_pm_ops to the same routine.  There are
+a few convenience macros that can be used for this purpose.
+
+The SIMPLE_DEV_PM_OPS macro declares a struct dev_pm_ops object with one
+suspend routine pointed to by the .suspend(), .freeze(), and .poweroff()
+members and one resume routine pointed to by the .resume(), .thaw(), and
+.restore() members.  The other function pointers in this struct dev_pm_ops are
+unset.
+
+The UNIVERSAL_DEV_PM_OPS macro is similar to SIMPLE_DEV_PM_OPS, but it
+additionally sets the .runtime_resume() pointer to the same value as
+.resume() (and .thaw(), and .restore()) and the .runtime_suspend() pointer to
+the same value as .suspend() (and .freeze() and .poweroff()).
+
+The SET_SYSTEM_SLEEP_PM_OPS can be used inside of a declaration of struct
+dev_pm_ops to indicate that one suspend routine is to be pointed to by the
+.suspend(), .freeze(), and .poweroff() members and one resume routine is to
+be pointed to by the .resume(), .thaw(), and .restore() members.
+
+3.2. Device Runtime Power Management
+------------------------------------
+In addition to providing device power management callbacks PCI device drivers
+are responsible for controlling the runtime power management (runtime PM) of
+their devices.
+
+The PCI device runtime PM is optional, but it is recommended that PCI device
+drivers implement it at least in the cases where there is a reliable way of
+verifying that the device is not used (like when the network cable is detached
+from an Ethernet adapter or there are no devices attached to a USB controller).
+
+To support the PCI runtime PM the driver first needs to implement the
+runtime_suspend() and runtime_resume() callbacks.  It also may need to implement
+the runtime_idle() callback to prevent the device from being suspended again
+every time right after the runtime_resume() callback has returned
+(alternatively, the runtime_suspend() callback will have to check if the
+device should really be suspended and return -EAGAIN if that is not the case).
+
+The runtime PM of PCI devices is disabled by default.  It is also blocked by
+pci_pm_init() that runs the pm_runtime_forbid() helper function.  If a PCI
+driver implements the runtime PM callbacks and intends to use the runtime PM
+framework provided by the PM core and the PCI subsystem, it should enable this
+feature by executing the pm_runtime_enable() helper function.  However, the
+driver should not call the pm_runtime_allow() helper function unblocking
+the runtime PM of the device.  Instead, it should allow user space or some
+platform-specific code to do that (user space can do it via sysfs), although
+once it has called pm_runtime_enable(), it must be prepared to handle the
+runtime PM of the device correctly as soon as pm_runtime_allow() is called
+(which may happen at any time).  [It also is possible that user space causes
+pm_runtime_allow() to be called via sysfs before the driver is loaded, so in
+fact the driver has to be prepared to handle the runtime PM of the device as
+soon as it calls pm_runtime_enable().]
+
+The runtime PM framework works by processing requests to suspend or resume
+devices, or to check if they are idle (in which cases it is reasonable to
+subsequently request that they be suspended).  These requests are represented
+by work items put into the power management workqueue, pm_wq.  Although there
+are a few situations in which power management requests are automatically
+queued by the PM core (for example, after processing a request to resume a
+device the PM core automatically queues a request to check if the device is
+idle), device drivers are generally responsible for queuing power management
+requests for their devices.  For this purpose they should use the runtime PM
+helper functions provided by the PM core, discussed in
+Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.
+
+Devices can also be suspended and resumed synchronously, without placing a
+request into pm_wq.  In the majority of cases this also is done by their
+drivers that use helper functions provided by the PM core for this purpose.
+
+For more information on the runtime PM of devices refer to
+Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.
+
+
+4. Resources
+============
+
+PCI Local Bus Specification, Rev. 3.0
+PCI Bus Power Management Interface Specification, Rev. 1.2
+Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) Specification, Rev. 3.0b
+PCI Express Base Specification, Rev. 2.0
+Documentation/power/devices.txt
+Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt

Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt

@@ -18,44 +18,46 @@ and pm_qos_params.h.  This is done because having the available parameters
 being runtime configurable or changeable from a driver was seen as too easy to
 abuse.
 
-For each parameter a list of performance requirements is maintained along with
+For each parameter a list of performance requests is maintained along with
 an aggregated target value.  The aggregated target value is updated with
-changes to the requirement list or elements of the list.  Typically the
-aggregated target value is simply the max or min of the requirement values held
+changes to the request list or elements of the list.  Typically the
+aggregated target value is simply the max or min of the request values held
 in the parameter list elements.
 
 From kernel mode the use of this interface is simple:
-pm_qos_add_requirement(param_id, name, target_value):
-Will insert a named element in the list for that identified PM_QOS parameter
-with the target value.  Upon change to this list the new target is recomputed
-and any registered notifiers are called only if the target value is now
-different.
 
-pm_qos_update_requirement(param_id, name, new_target_value):
-Will search the list identified by the param_id for the named list element and
-then update its target value, calling the notification tree if the aggregated
-target is changed.  with that name is already registered.
+handle = pm_qos_add_request(param_class, target_value):
+Will insert an element into the list for that identified PM_QOS class with the
+target value.  Upon change to this list the new target is recomputed and any
+registered notifiers are called only if the target value is now different.
+Clients of pm_qos need to save the returned handle.
 
-pm_qos_remove_requirement(param_id, name):
-Will search the identified list for the named element and remove it, after
-removal it will update the aggregate target and call the notification tree if
-the target was changed as a result of removing the named requirement.
+void pm_qos_update_request(handle, new_target_value):
+Will update the list element pointed to by the handle with the new target value
+and recompute the new aggregated target, calling the notification tree if the
+target is changed.
+
+void pm_qos_remove_request(handle):
+Will remove the element.  After removal it will update the aggregate target and
+call the notification tree if the target was changed as a result of removing
+the request.
 
 
 From user mode:
-Only processes can register a pm_qos requirement.  To provide for automatic
-cleanup for process the interface requires the process to register its
-parameter requirements in the following way:
+Only processes can register a pm_qos request.  To provide for automatic
+cleanup of a process, the interface requires the process to register its
+parameter requests in the following way:
 
 To register the default pm_qos target for the specific parameter, the process
 must open one of /dev/[cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput]
 
 As long as the device node is held open that process has a registered
-requirement on the parameter.  The name of the requirement is "process_<PID>"
-derived from the current->pid from within the open system call.
+request on the parameter.
 
-To change the requested target value the process needs to write a s32 value to
-the open device node.  This translates to a pm_qos_update_requirement call.
+To change the requested target value the process needs to write an s32 value to
+the open device node.  Alternatively the user mode program could write a hex
+string for the value using 10 char long format e.g. "0x12345678".  This
+translates to a pm_qos_update_request call.
 
 To remove the user mode request for a target value simply close the device
 node.

Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt

@@ -8,11 +8,11 @@ Please see overview.txt for a description of the terms used in this text.
 1. Consumer Regulator Access (static & dynamic drivers)
 =======================================================
 
-A consumer driver can get access to it's supply regulator by calling :-
+A consumer driver can get access to its supply regulator by calling :-
 
 regulator = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc");
 
-The consumer passes in it's struct device pointer and power supply ID. The core
+The consumer passes in its struct device pointer and power supply ID. The core
 then finds the correct regulator by consulting a machine specific lookup table.
 If the lookup is successful then this call will return a pointer to the struct
 regulator that supplies this consumer.
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ usually be called in your device drivers probe() and remove() respectively.
 2. Regulator Output Enable & Disable (static & dynamic drivers)
 ====================================================================
 
-A consumer can enable it's power supply by calling:-
+A consumer can enable its power supply by calling:-
 
 int regulator_enable(regulator);
 
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ int regulator_is_enabled(regulator);
 This will return > zero when the regulator is enabled.
 
 
-A consumer can disable it's supply when no longer needed by calling :-
+A consumer can disable its supply when no longer needed by calling :-
 
 int regulator_disable(regulator);
 
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ by calling :-
 int regulator_set_optimum_mode(struct regulator *regulator, int load_uA);
 
 This will cause the core to recalculate the total load on the regulator (based
-on all it's consumers) and change operating mode (if necessary and permitted)
+on all its consumers) and change operating mode (if necessary and permitted)
 to best match the current operating load.
 
 The load_uA value can be determined from the consumers datasheet. e.g.most